JP2020203175A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of determining a degree of expectation toward winning in performance units under one variation performance while suppressing loss of interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a plurality of notice performances indicating degrees of expectation toward a jackpot under a variation performance, a rank of a degree of expectation indicated by each of the notice performances is separately determined. In this case, when a degree of expectation toward a jackpot of one rank is indicated in a notice performance under a variation performance, in a next notice performance (a subsequent notice performance), patterns which correspond to ranks having lower degrees of expectation toward a jackpot than that of the one rank are not selected in determination of the rank of the degree of expectation shown in the next notice performance. Thus, a decrease in degree of expectation toward a jackpot after a high degree of expectation toward a jackpot is shown can be prevented in the plurality of notice performances executed during one variation performance, thus suppressing the loss of player's interest.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting winning prize). For example, three horizontal or vertical scrolls in the effective display area, or 3 × 3 squares. A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are predetermined at the predetermined stop positions. It causes a hit when there is.

In addition, there is a gaming machine that not only displays the variable effect on the display means but also executes an effect that shows the player the expected degree of winning during the variable effect. In many of such game machines, an effect of showing the player the expected degree of winning is executed a plurality of times during one variable effect. As a result, even if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is performed, the player can expect to win without getting bored by executing the effect of showing the player the expected degree of hit during the variation effect multiple times. You can play the game while enhancing the feeling.

JP-A-2007-312981

In a conventional game machine, when an effect indicating a winning expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during a variable effect, the pattern of the effect to be executed a plurality of times is collectively determined at the start of the variation. On the other hand, a method of determining the degree of expectation that will be a hit in each production unit can be considered.

However, when determining the degree of expectation to be hit in each effect unit during one variable effect, there may be a case where an effect showing a high degree of expectation is performed once and then an effect having a low degree of expectation is performed. As a result, the player realizes that it may be unlikely that he / she will win, even though he / she has raised the expectation that he / she will win once, and he / she is disappointed and enjoys playing the game. There is a risk that it will be distorted.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a distraction from the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 has an acquisition means for acquiring random information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and an operation of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. The variation effect is performed based on the main control means having the selection means for selecting the type of the variation effect which is the target display and the type of the variation effect selected by the selection means in response to the instruction from the main control means. A sub-control means having a variation effect executing means to be executed is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the variation effect executed by the variation effect execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. The sub-control means is a predetermined unit for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear in the variation effect during one execution of the variation effect by the variation effect executing means. It is provided with a suggestion effect executing means for executing the suggestion effect a plurality of times, and a selection means for selecting the expectation degree type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means for each of the predetermined suggestion effects. The predetermined suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear depending on the difference in the display type when displaying the display mode, and the selection means , All kinds of the display types can be selected for the first predetermined suggestion effect in the variation effect, and the counter updated within the predetermined range and the counter are updated at the predetermined update timing. A defining means for storing a boundary value when a predetermined range is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed by the predetermined suggestion effect corresponding to each display type, the boundary value, and a counter value. Based on this, the determination means for determining whether or not to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed in the order of the degree of expectation, and the determination means for determining the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed by the determination means. When it is determined that a specific display type is selected as the display type, the game machine includes an information storage means for storing information related to the specific display type, and the game machine comprises the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed. In the selection, when determining whether or not to select a predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type and the specific display stored in the information storage means are used. When the types are the same, a means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, and an operation that can be operated by the player. One of the predetermined suggestive effects, which comprises a means of operation and includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, is the variable effect for a predetermined time after the execution of the variable effect is started. When the lapse has passed, it is executed by the suggestion effect executing means, and after the execution of the one suggestion effect, the period during which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect executing means triggered by the operation of the operation means is set. Provided.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, an acquisition means for acquiring random information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a variable effect of dynamically displaying identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. A main control means having a selection means for selecting a type, and a variation effect execution means for executing the variation effect based on the type of the variation effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. The sub-control means is provided, and when a predetermined identification information appears in the variation effect executed by the variation effect executing means, the player is given a predetermined game value. The control means executes a predetermined suggestion effect for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the variation effect a plurality of times during the execution of one variation effect by the variation effect execution means. The predetermined suggestion effect includes a suggestion effect execution means and a selection means for selecting the expectation type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means for each of the predetermined suggestion effects. A plurality of types of effects having different display modes are provided, and the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears due to the difference in the display type when displaying the display mode is shown, and the selection means is the first in the variable effect. All types of the display types can be selected for the predetermined suggestion effect, and the counter updated within the predetermined range and the predetermined range in which the counter is updated are suggested at the predetermined update timing. The predetermined means to be executed based on the defining means for storing the boundary value when associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed in the effect for each display type, the boundary value, and the value of the counter. As the display type of the suggestion effect of the above, a determination means for determining whether or not to select the display type in the order of expectation, and a specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed by the determination means. When it is determined to select, the game machine includes an information storage means for storing information regarding the specific display type, and the game machine sets the boundary value in selecting the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed. When determining whether or not to select a predetermined display type based on the value of the counter, the predetermined display type and the specific display type stored in the information storage means are the same. The table includes means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type for the predetermined suggestion effect, and operating means that can be operated by the player. One of the predetermined suggestion effects having a plurality of types of effects having different presentation modes is the suggestion effect execution when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the execution of the variation effect in the variation effect. It is executed by the means, and after the execution of the one suggestion effect, a period during which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means is provided when the operation means is operated. It is possible to provide a game machine that can prevent the game from being distracted.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a jackpot type table, and (c) is a schematic diagram of a jackpot variation pattern table. FIG. 2D is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern table for deviation (normal), and FIG. 3E is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern table for deviation (probability variation) schematically. It is a schematic diagram shown. It is a timing chart which shows the time passage of the fluctuation effect executed by super reach A. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, and (b) is the third symbol in the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152. It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the image displayed on the display device 81. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the cut-in image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155. It is a figure explaining the mode which shows the expectation degree of a jackpot in each notice production, and the judgment upper limit value pointer given for each expectation degree. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of a display control device. (A) to (c) are explanatory views for explaining the image at the time of power-on. (A) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the back surface B. (A) to (c) are explanatory views explaining the back surface C. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table for variation schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the additional data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the variation processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the vibration sensor input monitoring processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect rank determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the main process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the confirmed command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Yes, (c) is a flowchart showing a demo command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the error command processing executed by the MPU in the control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the comparison process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect rank determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first rank determination table 222c1, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the second rank determination table 222c2. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the third rank determination table 222c3, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a 5-rank determination table 222c5. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect rank determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect rank determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the advance notice effect rank determination processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 51, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is a button that receives an operation instruction (for example, a pressing instruction) by the player. When the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is given, the pachinko machine 10 allows the player to play the game by changing the screen display of the third symbol display device 81, which will be described later, or changing the output sound or the lamp display. You can actively participate.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. For example, on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, illumination portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the inside of the operation handle 51 permits the driving of the ball launch unit 112a. Touch sensor 51a for this purpose, push button type stop switch 51b that stops firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 by the change of electrical resistance. (Not shown) and is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50.

An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, and a first. It is configured by assembling a ball entry port (starting port) 64, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are wood screws from the front side of the game board 13. It is fixed by etc. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display fluctuations by indicating whether or not the fluctuations are being made in association with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) by the lighting state, or stop symbols after the fluctuations are completed. As a result, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is shown by the lighting state, or among the balls entered in the first entry opening 64, the balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed. The number of reserved balls, which is a number, is indicated by a lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, in the lottery performed for entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, whether or not it is a big hit is determined, and if it is determined to be a big hit, the type of the big hit is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and time saving jackpot are prepared. The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "2R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, the "time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and the time saving state occurs during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations).

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) described later is increased, and the electric accessory (not shown) attached to the first entrance 64 is released. By making it easier, the game includes a state in which the ball can easily enter the first ball entrance 64.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol (normal symbol) is increased. It refers to a state of a game in which a ball can easily enter the first entry port 64 by making it easier for the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 to be opened.

Instead of changing the hit probability of the second symbol, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened or one hit in the second symbol The number of times the electric accessory is opened may be changed. For example, in the low-probability state, the time-saving state or the high-probability state, the opening time of the electric accessory associated with the first entry port 64 may be longer than in other gaming states. Further, the time-saving state or the high-probability state in the low-probability state may be a state in which the number of times the electric accessory is opened per one time in the second symbol is larger than that in the other gaming states.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is a liquid crystal display that displays a variation of the third symbol while synchronizing with the variation display of the first symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol (ordinary symbol) triggered by the passage of a ball at the second entry port 67. A second symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having an size of 8 inches, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIGS. 5 and 14) described later, for example, left and middle. And the three symbols on the right are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and a variable display (variable effect) in which these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is supposed to be done. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is displayed. It is a decorative display according to the situation. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. Further, in FIG. 4, the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen are schematically shown together.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet that almost fills the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect in which the same main symbols are aligned. It is configured so that a big hit will occur after the fluctuation production is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability change state) after the jackpot ends, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers added (corresponding to the "high probability symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, when the state shifts to the low-probability state after the jackpot ends, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers added (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") are aligned.

The display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three areas. One is a variable display area Dm, one is an effect display area Db, and the other is a hold display area Ds.

The variable display area Dm is an area in which a variable effect in which the third symbol is variably displayed is displayed. The variable display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the variable display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Therefore, in the variable display area Dm, a total of nine third symbols of three rows × three stages are displayed.

Here, the middle part of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set as the effective line L1, and in each game (variation effect), the effective line is in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2. The third symbol is stopped and displayed on L1. When the third symbol is stopped, if the combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main symbols) is arranged on the effective line L1, the jackpot will be obtained and the jackpot effect will be performed.

The effect display area Db displays characters, character information, etc. on the back side of the third symbol, displays a notice effect while the variation effect is being performed in the variation display area Dm, or displays a jackpot effect at the time of a big hit. This is an area for displaying various effects images.

Here, the notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in the currently performing variable effect, so that the player can understand the degree of expectation that will be a big hit by the content of the image displayed in the notice effect. It has become. The player can raise the expectation of a big hit by seeing the advance notice effect displayed during the variable effect.

The pachinko machine 10 is prepared from a variation effect having a short variation time to a variation effect having a long variation time, and the advance notice effect is configured to be executed more as the variation time of the variation effect is longer. This is because if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect is long, the player may be bored until the stop display is displayed. By executing many advance notice effects, the player may be bored every time the notice effect is displayed. Can give a sense of expectation to the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and to make the player continue to play the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the notice effect is displayed in the effect display area Db only when the player operates the frame button 22 during the predetermined period of the variable effect for some of the advance notice effects, which is expected to be a big hit. The degree is displayed. As a result, it is possible to induce the player to operate the frame button 22 during the variable effect, and the player can actively participate in the game machine.

The details of the advance notice effect displayed in the effect display area Db will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

In the effect display area Db, a back image corresponding to the stage of the effect is displayed on the back side of the character and character information. The stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, there are three stages: "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are two stages. Then, a variable effect (a change in which a variable display (dynamic display) of the third symbol is performed), a reach effect, a notice effect, etc., which are performed when the ball enters the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), which will be described later, are performed. Various productions are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the variable effect is not performed, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, "city stage" → "empty stage" → "island". It is changed repeatedly in the order of "stage" → "city stage" → ... Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

The hold display area Ds is an area for displaying the number of hold balls, which is the number of balls (hold balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entered into the first entry port 64. Although the details will be described later, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the number of times the ball enters the ball. Is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the hold display area Ds.

In the hold display area Ds, one hold ball number symbol is displayed for each hold ball number symbol, and the hold ball number is displayed according to the display number of the hold ball number symbol. That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number symbol, it indicates that the reserved ball number is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, the reserved ball number symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 balls. When the hold ball number symbol is not displayed in the hold display area Ds, it indicates that the hold ball number is 0, that is, there is no hold ball. From the number of reserved balls displayed in the reserved display area Ds, the player can grasp the number of reserved balls held at that time.

Instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved display area Ds, the number of reserved balls is changed by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80, the game board 13, the front frame 12, etc. are provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls is increased according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. May be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display in which the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol) are alternately lit each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is something to do. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the first ball entry port 64 is activated (opened) for a predetermined time. Is configured to be). The number of times the ball has passed through the second entry port 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. It may be performed by using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port (starting winning opening) 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the first ball entry port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by the turning on of the first ball entry port switch. Then, a big hit lottery is made by the main control device 110, and the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is started (started). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined variation time, the variation effect is stopped, the display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as the third symbol. The stop display is displayed on the effective line L1 of the device 81 (variation display area Dm). In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

If a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), the ball entry is suspended up to four times. .. Then, the variable effect corresponding to the reserved ball (reserved ball) is performed after the end of the variable effect corresponding to the reserved ball that was held before that. As described above, the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved display area Ds.

In the pachinko machine 10, the number of balls entered into the first ball entry port 64 is set to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times. The number of times may be set to 5 or more (for example, 8 times).

A variable winning device 65 is arranged below the first ball opening 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) elapses, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And have. The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downward to the front, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closing state are formed. It operates so as to alternate between the state and the state.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and the specific winning opening is opened. A special gaming state is a game state in which a large opening port provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. It may be formed.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, and has a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and various data and the like are temporarily stored when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A RAM 203, which is a memory for storing, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a jackpot variation pattern table 202c, and a loss variation pattern table 202d as fixed value data used to control these processes. Further, the RAM 203 controls the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 (big hit lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83, etc.). Various counters are provided for this purpose.

Here, various counters provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. First, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an outline of various counters.

The jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 include the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit type counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol. , The stop pattern selection counter C3, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and the variation type counter CS1 used for the variation pattern selection are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), or at an interval of 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 28). Further, some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 28). The updated value of each counter is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The counter buffer 203b is an area for storing the value of each updated counter, and the MPU 201 uses the value stored in the counter buffer 203b for each counter at the update timing of the counter. Update the counter.

The RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four hold areas (hold first to fourth areas). The holding area is each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 read from the counter buffer 203b according to the timing of entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64. This is an area for temporarily storing (holding). Further, the execution area stores the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the fluctuation pattern and the stop type of the jackpot lottery and the fluctuation effect at the start timing of the fluctuation. It is an area to do.

When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered the first entry port 64 (starting winning), the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 of the counter buffer 203b at that time are detected. The value is stored in one of the reserved first to fourth areas. At this time, if there is no hold in the hold area and all of the hold first to fourth areas are empty areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold first area. When there is only one hold in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first area, the value of each counter is stored in the hold second area. When there are two holds in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first to second areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold third area. When there are three holds in the hold area and the value of each counter is stored only in the hold first to third areas, the value of each counter is stored in the hold fourth area. As a result, the values of the counters acquired from the counter buffer 203b at the timing of the start winning are stored in the hold 1st area, the hold 2nd area, the hold 3rd area, and the hold 4th area in the order of the start winning. Can be done. If a start winning prize is detected while the values of the counters are stored in all of the reserved first to fourth areas, the values of the counters at that time are discarded without being held. That is, in the present embodiment, the value of each counter can be held up to a maximum of four starting prizes.

Further, when the start timing of the fluctuation effect is reached, the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold first area to the execution area, and the MPU 201 moves the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Based on the value of each counter stored in the execution area, a big hit lottery, a fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, and a type of stop symbol are determined.

Further, after the value of each counter in the hold 1st area is moved to the execution area, the value of each counter stored in the hold 2nd area is shifted to the vacant hold 1st area and stored in the hold 3rd area. The value of each counter is shifted to the vacant second area of hold, and the value of each counter stored in the fourth area of hold is shifted to the vacant third area of hold. As a result, when the variation effect is started based on the value of each counter held in the holding ball storage area 203c, the holding is reduced by one and one area of the holding area is opened.

Each counter will be described in detail. As described above, the first random number counter C1 is a counter to be used for the big hit lottery, and is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in the present embodiment). The first random number counter C1 is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is done by returning to 0 afterwards. In addition, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is used. As a new initial value, the random number counter C1 per first is set, and the value is updated from the initial value.

As described above, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used for the initial value of the first random number counter C1, and is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. For example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also composed of a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is not only updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) is executed, but is also updated repeatedly within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 28).

The value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the counter buffer 203b is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entry port 64. Then, at the start of fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is a random number value (big hit random number value, also referred to as a hit value) that becomes a big hit, and a big hit. Perform a lottery. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot (big hit random number value) is set by the jackpot random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the reserved ball storage area 203c (execution of the reserved ball storage area 203c). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the area) matches the jackpot random number value set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 7A. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a shows the value (big hit random number value) of the first hit random number counter C1 determined to be a jackpot. In this jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot random number value whose game state is referred to in a low probability state (that is, a period during which the probability change is not in progress) and a jackpot random number value whose game state is referred to in a high probability state (that is, during probability change). It is divided into and, and the number of jackpot random number values included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the present embodiment, the first random number counter C1 is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In addition, the number of jackpot random number values that are jackpots in the low probability state is three, and the values "7,307,582" are associated with the "low probability state" and stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .. On the other hand, the number of jackpot random numbers that become jackpots in a high probability state is 30, and the values "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 "is associated with the" high probability state "in the jackpot random number table 202a. It is stored.

When determining the jackpot, the MPU 201 reads the jackpot random number value corresponding to the game state at that time from the jackpot random number table 203a. Then, in the MPU 201, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 (first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area 203c) used for determining the jackpot is the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 203a. It is determined whether or not it matches one of the above, and if it matches, it is determined as a big hit.

That is, when the game state is a low probability state, a big hit is obtained when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches any one of "7,307,582". Since the first random number counter C1 is updated in the range of 0 to 899, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/300. When the game state is a high probability state, the value of the random number counter C1 per first is "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298,322,354,390,420, 420, 448,486,506,534,567,569,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892 ”is a big hit. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/30.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the low probability state and the jackpot random number value read from the jackpot random number table 202a in the high probability state are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value is set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as the jackpot random number value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, that value may be input from the outside and the jackpot may be easily assigned illegally. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), it becomes a jackpot. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters provided in the RAM 203 will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (starting prize). Together with the first random number counter C1, it is stored in any of the hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the way, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect Or, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of disconnection. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big hit. .. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 7B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, "15R probability variation jackpot", the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and 100. There is a "15R normal jackpot" in which the time is shortened during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variation jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 7A, the value "0 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variation jackpot, and the value "40 to 39" of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79 ”is associated with it, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation jackpot.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. .. For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot, a 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, a 15R normal jackpot is selected with a 40% probability, and a 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a 20% probability. .. The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 determines the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") when the counter is out of order. For example, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and the maximum value (the maximum value). That is, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The stop types selected in the present embodiment include "front-back off reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the final stop symbol after the same reach occurs. There are three stop (directing) patterns: "reach other than front and back," which stops except before and after the reach symbol, and "completely off," where reach does not occur.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64 (start winning), the RAM 203 It is stored in any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c. Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the way, the stop type in the variation effect Is the one at the time of detachment. In this case, the stop type at the time of disconnection is determined based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area.

In the present embodiment, the ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of tables (not shown) having different ranges of random values selected for the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table with a wide random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. "Completely off" is easily selected. In this table, the range of random numbers corresponding to "front and back out reach" and "front and back out of reach" is narrow, with "front and back out reach" of 98,99 and "front and back out of reach" of 90 to 97. It becomes difficult to select "out of reach" or "reach other than front and back out of reach".

In addition, in the low probability state, a table with a narrow random value range of 0 to 79 corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is selected in order to secure the ball entry time into the first entry port 64. It becomes difficult to select "completely off". In this table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach other than front and rear deviation" is widened to 80 to 97, and "reach other than front and rear deviation" can be easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform many reach displays with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do. Also in the latter table, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of "reach before and after" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is a loop counter for use in determining a fluctuation pattern. For example, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is added one by one in the range of 0 to 198, reaches the maximum value (that is, 198), and then returns to 0. There is. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 28).

At the start of fluctuation, the MPU 201 refers to the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the fluctuation pattern table stored in the ROM 202, and the fluctuation pattern to be executed by the fluctuation type counter CS1 fluctuation effect. To determine. The fluctuation pattern determined here is the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation.

That is, the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation as the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, the specific variation mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the third symbol is selected from the fluctuation modes capable of displaying fluctuations in the fluctuation time. The details of the variation mode of the third symbol to be displayed on the display device 81 are determined. Then, according to the determined variation mode, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the third symbol in a variable manner, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the variation display. At the same time as outputting, the lamps of the lamp display devices 227 (illumination units 29 to 33) are turned on and blinked.

As described above, in the main control device 110, only the fluctuation time is determined as the process of determining the fluctuation pattern, and the details of the fluctuation mode according to the fluctuation time are described in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. decide. The MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer and cannot perform complicated processing. However, when determining the fluctuation pattern, the main control unit 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time. Compared with the case where the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the process of determining the variation pattern of the main control device 110 can be easily performed. Further, when the main control device 110 determines the details of the variation mode, the detailed information of the determined variation mode must be notified to the voice lamp control device 113 or the like, and the command required for the notification is, for example, 3. There is a risk that it will have to be composed of more than bytes, which may complicate sending and receiving commands. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the main control device 110 is configured to determine only the fluctuation time, if only the information regarding the determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the like. Often, the configuration of the command related to the notification can be simplified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated transmission / reception of commands. Further, even if the main control device 110 determines only the fluctuation time of the symbol variation, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the variation mode according to the specified variation time from among many variation modes. However, since the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the variation in the determined variation mode, it is possible to give the player a variety of variation effects and improve the interest of the player. be able to.

By the way, in this embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern table used for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c used at the time of jackpot and the fluctuation pattern table 202c for jackpot are used at the time of deviation. A variation pattern table 202d for disengagement is prepared. Further, as the deviation pattern table 202d, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern is used depending on whether the gaming state is a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a low-probability state at normal time excluding the time-saving state. A table 202d2 and a variation pattern table 202d1 for deviation (normal) are prepared.

Here, the details of various fluctuation patterns will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 (c) to 7 (e). First, FIG. 7C is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern table 202c stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7C, the jackpot variation pattern table 202c is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type. Specifically, it is divided into a common 15R jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 15R probability variation jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot, and a 2R probability variation jackpot that is referred to when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot. Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is the jackpot random number value at the start of fluctuation, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area is selected. Correspondingly, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is determined from the jackpot fluctuation table 202c.

Common to the 15R jackpot, there are fluctuation patterns A with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds and fluctuation B with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds. The correspondence between the fluctuations A and B and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 39 for the fluctuation A and 40 to 198 for the fluctuation B.

When variation A (30 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of normal reach under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. When the variation B (60 seconds) is selected as the variation pattern, the variation effect is performed in the mode of super reach under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114.

The no-reach is a reach with a short fluctuation time, and is a fluctuation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned after the short reach (so-called bitter stop and the symbols are aligned). Further, the super reach is a variation pattern in which the first symbol (or the third symbol) is aligned (for example, a reach developed from a long reach or a normal reach) after a reach with a variation time longer than that of the normal reach. Since the table common to the 15R jackpot is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is selected, the super reach is easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. However, by configuring the normal reach to be selected, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any reach.

As for the normal reach and the super reach executed by the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, many different production contents are prepared even if the fluctuation time is the same. For example, in addition to the normal reach in which no character is displayed, when two symbols on the effective line L1 become the same symbol and reach a reach state, or at other timings, the predetermined character or character information is once or more than once. There is a reach that displays the times and gives a notice effect. In addition, various characters are prepared to be displayed in this case. In addition, there are multiple reach with different production contents, such as a reach that changes the back image quickly and displays it, a reach that adds a notice effect before the start of fluctuation, and a reach that adds a production that becomes a big hit by re-variation. ing. As a result, it is possible to execute a variety of variable effects and enhance the interest of the player. The reach in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the variation effect of 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

Next, the variation pattern selected exclusively for the 2R probability variation jackpot is only the 2R variation with a variation time of 31 seconds, and the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 198. That is, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is determined as the fluctuation pattern regardless of the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

When 2R fluctuation (31 seconds) is selected as the fluctuation pattern, one mode is selected from a plurality of prepared fluctuation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot by the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. , The variable effect is performed in the selected mode. As a variation mode dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot, for example, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol together with the character of "chicken", or a "girl" that does not normally appear. Along with the character, a variation mode in which the final first symbol (or third symbol) stops at a specific symbol is included.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, another fluctuation type counter for finely adjusting the fluctuation time in about ± several seconds may be provided, and whether or not to add a notice effect that announces the start of the jackpot or reach effect before or during the fluctuation effect. It may be determined by another variable type counter.

FIG. 7D is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7D, the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 is exclusively for complete disengagement, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, and front / rear disengagement reach and front / rear disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than is determined and the stop type at the time of disconnection, and the value of the variable type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. It is attached. When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is not a jackpot value (big hit random number value) at the start of fluctuation, that is, if it is a value that is out of order, the gaming state excludes the time saving state. When the probability is low during normal operation, the variation corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area corresponds to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area. The pattern is determined from the out-of-order (normal) variation pattern.

For complete deviation only, there are fluctuation patterns D, which is 7 seconds and the fluctuation is completed in a short time and the reach is not established, and fluctuation E which is 10 seconds and the fluctuation time is longer than the fluctuation D but the reach is not established. The association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 149 for variation D (7 seconds) and 150 to 198 for variation E (10 seconds). Further, in common to the reach, there are the above-mentioned fluctuation A (30 seconds) and fluctuation B (60 seconds) as fluctuation patterns, and the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is that fluctuation A (30 seconds) is 0 to 0. In 197, fluctuation B (60 seconds) is 198.

FIG. 7 (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the deviation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 7 (e), the disengagement (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement, similarly to the disengagement (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. It is divided into the one for complete disconnection and the common reach that is referred to when the reach other than front and rear detachment is determined as the stop type at the time of detachment. Then, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected in each group for each of the divided groups. The fluctuation patterns selected when the complete deviation only is referred to are fluctuation D (7 seconds) and fluctuation E (10 seconds), as in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1. Further, the variation patterns selected when the reach common is referred to are the variation A (30 seconds) and the variation B (60 seconds) as in the deviation pattern table 202d1.

When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that is out of the game, and the game state is in a time saving state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, execution is performed. Depending on the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the area, the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area is the deviation pattern table 202d2. Is determined from.

In this deviation pattern table 202d2, the association with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 dedicated to complete deviation is 0 to 190 for fluctuation D (7 seconds) and 191 to 198 for fluctuation E (10 seconds). It has become. Further, the association with the value of the variation type counter CS1 common to the reach is 0 to 197 for variation A (30 seconds) and 198 for variation B.

Since the deviation pattern table 202d2 is a table that is referred to when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, it is considered that the ball can easily enter the first ball entry port 64. Become. Therefore, if a lot of fluctuations E with a relatively long fluctuation time are performed while in the time saving state or the high probability state, it takes time until the start of the next fluctuation display, giving the player a waiting state. It may cause discomfort to the player. In addition, the operating rate of the hall is lowered, which is not preferable. Therefore, in the case of complete deviation, when the gaming state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the fluctuation D having a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation E is larger than when the gaming state is in the normal state excluding the time saving state. By configuring the device so that it can be easily selected and starting the next variable display at an early stage, the possibility of causing discomfort to the player can be reduced. In addition, it is possible to suppress an extremely low operating rate.

Although the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination and selected (presence or absence of a notice display or the like is selected). In addition, when reach is established at the time of disconnection, another variable type counter determines how many symbols the first symbol (or third symbol) to be stopped at the end is shifted to stop (for example, one symbol is displaced before and after). May be determined by.

Further, the selection of the deviation type is divided into the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d1 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, but there are a plurality of reserved balls even during the normal game state. In the case of (for example, if the maximum number is 4, the variation display may be terminated at an early stage), the variation display may be selected by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d2. It may be configured to prepare a fluctuation pattern table for normal use or probability variation corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern tables for deviations shown in FIGS. 7 (d) and 7 (e), the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply regarded as deviations, and when the deviations are selected, the other tables are referred to. , Fluctuation D and variation E may be configured to be selected with a predetermined probability. Of course, in this case as well, tables corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 6, various counters will be described. As described above, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and is added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 250, for example, after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). It is configured as a loop counter that returns to 0. In addition, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round (when the initial value is periodically updated and then returns to the initial value at the next update), the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used. Is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right second entry port (through gate) 67. Obtained when it is done. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the acquired value of the random number counter C4 per second is in the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that the player has won, and the second symbol display device 83 has a symbol "○" as a stop symbol (second symbol). Is lit and displayed, and the first ball entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time. The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 19). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 25).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, a jackpot lottery and a display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the value of the counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack that stores the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, and the like, in addition to the counter buffer 203b and the holding ball storage area 203c for storing the various counters shown in FIG. It has an area and a work area (work area) in which various flags, counters, I / O values, and the like are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 28) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 27) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a. The hold ball number counter 203a holds the fluctuation display (variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of balls (waiting number) up to 4 times. The initial value of the reserved ball counter 203a is set to zero, and each time a ball is inserted into the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S1403 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variation display based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is executed (see S1205 in FIG. 23).

The value of the hold ball number counter 203a (that is, the hold ball number) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the hold ball number command (see S1406 in FIG. 25). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the ball is entered into the first ball entry port 64 and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 is the value of the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation display itself held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the hold ball number counter 203a is added. Can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it does, the deviation can be corrected by the next received hold ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the hold ball number symbol in the hold display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 based on the hold ball number notified by the display hold ball number command.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of an opening / closing plate of a specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. To send.

Further, various switches 208 including switch groups and sensor groups (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processes are executed based on the signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The ROM 222 has at least a detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a and a judgment upper limit value pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 includes a hold ball number counter 223a, a detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, a notice effect flag 223c, a notice effect counter 223d, a judgment rank counter 223e, and a first It has at least 2 pointers 223f and a frame button operation flag 223g. Here, first, the reserved ball number counter 223a will be described, and then the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a, and the advance notice effect flag 223c will be described. After that, the advance notice effect counter 223d, the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the frame button operation flag 223g will be described in this order.

The reserved ball number counter 223a is a variation effect (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the reserved ball number counter 223a manages the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is added by entering the first ball entry port 64 and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. When the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, hold in the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls of the variable effect) is stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a (see S2007 in FIG. 32).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110, and the third symbol is accompanied by the reception. When the mode of the fluctuation display on the display device 81 is set, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is subtracted by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). In this way, since the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is updated according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value can be updated while synchronizing with the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. ..

The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the reserved ball number counter 223a, or stores the reserved ball number counter 223a in response to the reception of the fluctuation pattern command. At the timing of updating the value of, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the hold ball number counter 223a after storage or update.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 is displayed. The drawing of the image is controlled so as to be displayed in the hold display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 (see S2751 in FIG. 46 (a)). As described above, the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is changed while synchronizing with the hold counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the reserved display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball counter 403a of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a are counters for determining the fluctuation mode (detailed fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect to be started from now on based on the fluctuation pattern notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. And the table.

In the present embodiment, no character is displayed during the fluctuation time of 30 seconds as a detailed fluctuation pattern determined when the fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110. In addition to the normal normal reach, a plurality of normal reach in which a predetermined character is displayed while fluctuating are prepared. This normal reach includes a variation pattern in which a notice effect is performed a plurality of times during one variation effect.

Further, as a detailed pattern determined when the fluctuation B (variation time 60 seconds) is instructed, a predetermined character may be displayed during the fluctuation time of 60 seconds, or the rear image may be rapidly changed and displayed. There are multiple super reach such as. This super reach includes a variation pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed more during the variation effect of 1 than in the case of the normal reach.

Further, as a detailed fluctuation pattern determined when the 2R fluctuation (variation time 31 seconds) is instructed, a plurality of fluctuation modes dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot with a fluctuation time of 31 seconds are prepared.

The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a are prepared for a plurality of fluctuation patterns notified by the fluctuation pattern command when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. From the detailed fluctuation patterns, it is used to determine one detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect to be executed for the fluctuation pattern command.

The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is periodically updated (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30)). The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is composed of a loop counter, and its update is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). It is done by. Further, the initial value "0" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on.

The detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a corresponds to various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for each fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, 2R fluctuation) notified from the main controller 110. In addition, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is determined. Further, the correspondence between the detailed fluctuation pattern and the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b depends on whether the symbol that is confirmed and displayed in the fluctuation effect is "big hit" or "off", and the fluctuation pattern (variation A, fluctuation B, It is associated separately for each 2R fluctuation).

When the MPU 221 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 reads the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b at that time from the RAM 223. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is from the fluctuation type notified by the received stop type command, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b read from the RAM 223 in the "big hit" of the fluctuation pattern notified by the received fluctuation pattern command. The detailed variation pattern associated with is specified from the detailed variation pattern table 222a. If it is determined that the variation type is out of the variation type notified by the received stop type command, the value of the detailed variation pattern counter 223b read from the RAM 223 in the "outlier" of the variation pattern notified by the received variation pattern command. The detailed variation pattern associated with is specified from the detailed variation pattern table 222a.

The MPU 221 controls the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 based on the determined detailed variation pattern, and also causes the display control device 114 to display the determined detailed variation pattern by the display variation pattern command. Notice. Then, the display control device 114 controls the variation display of the third symbol display device 81 based on the detailed variation pattern notified by the display variation pattern command. As a result, the voice output device 226, the lamp display device 227, and the third symbol display device 81 perform a variation effect according to the determined detailed variation pattern.

When the fluctuation D (variation time 7 seconds) is instructed by the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110, one detailed fluctuation pattern is prepared in which the fluctuation time of 7 seconds is completely deviated. There is. When the fluctuation E (variation time 10 seconds) is instructed, one fluctuation pattern is prepared for the details of the mode in which the fluctuation time of 10 seconds is completely deviated after the lapse.

Therefore, when the fluctuation D or the fluctuation E is instructed by the main control device 110, the MPU 221 determines the detailed fluctuation pattern prepared corresponding to the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223a, and determines the detailed fluctuation pattern prepared for each. Based on this, the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the detailed fluctuation pattern thereof is notified to the display control device 114 by the display fluctuation pattern command.

The notice effect flag 223c is a flag indicating that the variation effect being executed is performed by a variation pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the variation effect. When the rehearsal effect flag 223c is on, it indicates that the variation effect being executed is performed by the variation pattern, and when it is off, it indicates that the variation effect being executed is performed by another variation pattern. Shown.

When the detailed variation pattern is determined based on the detailed variation pattern counter 223b and the detailed variation pattern table 222a when the advance notice effect flag 223c receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. In addition, it is set by the MPU 221 according to the determined detailed fluctuation pattern. That is, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the variation effect, the advance notice effect flag 223c is set to ON, and the determined detailed variation pattern is another variation. If it is a pattern, the warning effect flag 223c is set to off.

The MPU 221 controls to execute the advance notice effect in the variable effect being executed when the advance notice effect flag 223c is set to ON. The details of the control will be described later.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13, the fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation A, the normal reach in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times, and the fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation B. The super reach, in which the advance notice is performed multiple times, will be described.

In addition, in order to simplify the explanation, in this embodiment, it is assumed that one normal reach and one super reach in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times are prepared, and they are referred to as normal reach A and super reach A, respectively. However, it goes without saying that the present invention can be applied even if a plurality of such normal reach and special reach are prepared.

First, FIG. 8 is a timing chart showing the time course of the variation effect executed by the super reach A. In the timing chart of FIG. 8, the number of seconds shown in parentheses indicates the elapsed time when the fluctuation start is 0 seconds.

In the fluctuation effect by Super Reach A, when the fluctuation is started, first, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 are accelerated from the stopped (stopped) state to the state of scrolling at high speed. The third symbol display device 81 displays a high-speed fluctuation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 scroll at a high speed invisible to the player for a predetermined second. Then, 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 are sequentially stopped, a reach is established, and the middle symbol row Z2 is scrolled at a medium speed or a low speed visible to the player for 20 seconds. The fluctuation is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation effect by the normal reach A, the same high-speed variation (10 seconds) and the normal reach variation (20 seconds) as the variation effect by the super reach A are performed. Then, 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped, and the third symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display).

On the other hand, in the fluctuation effect by Super Reach A, after displaying the normal reach fluctuation for 20 seconds (30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), an image for notifying the player that the fluctuation will develop into the super reach fluctuation (development image). ) Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 for 10 seconds.

In this way, until the normal reach variation is completed, the variation effect by the super reach A and the variation effect by the normal reach A are performed with the same contents. As a result, the player cannot grasp whether it is due to the normal reach A or the super reach A. As described above, when the variable effect is performed by the super reach, the expectation that a big hit will be obtained as a result of the variable effect is higher than in the case of the normal reach. Therefore, as the end of the normal reach fluctuation approaches, the player confirms the third symbol and ends the fluctuation production as the normal reach, or the development image is displayed and the player develops into the super reach fluctuation and super. We will watch over the fluctuation production while expecting that the fluctuation production will end as a reach. Therefore, even when the variable effect is performed by the normal reach, which is a big hit and has a low expectation, the player can pay attention to the variable effect until the end without getting bored.

In the development image displayed by the variable effect by Super Reach A, by changing the rear image displayed in the effect display area Db from the one displayed up to that point, the player is informed that the image has evolved into Super Reach. I'm notifying you.

Further, in the developed image in this Super Reach A, the variation display of the third symbol displayed in the variation display area Dm is moved to the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 and displayed in a small size. .. The variation display of the third symbol is performed in a small display state until immediately before the variation effect is stopped and displayed. As a result, in the subsequent super reach variation, various character and character information can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the variation display of the third symbol, so that an elaborate effect is performed in the super reach variation. In that case, the player can be made to pay attention to the production. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player by the elaborate production that draws the player's attention.

After displaying the development image for 10 seconds, that is, 40 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A, the super reach fluctuation is performed for 20 seconds. In the super reach fluctuation in the super reach A, the character and character information are displayed in the fluctuation display area Db while the reach of the third symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, so that the expectation for a big hit is expected. By increasing the degree, the player's interest in the game is increasing. Then, 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed again in the fluctuation display area Dm shown in FIG. 4, while the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed to confirm the third symbol. In the final display of the third symbol, a jackpot is obtained when a combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 (see FIG. 4). Further, if the combination of jackpot symbols is not aligned on the effective line L1, it will be off.

By the way, in the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A, as described above, the advance notice effect is performed at various timings, and in some of the advance notice effects, the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22. It is done when. Next, the advance notice effect performed in the variable effect by the super reach A and the variable effect by the normal reach A will be described.

In the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the variation effect by the normal reach A, as shown in FIG. 8, first, the comment display 151 is performed as a notice effect during the high-speed fluctuation. The comment display 151 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 triggered by the player instructing the operation of the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button is turned ON).

The notice effect by the comment display 151 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, when high-speed fluctuation is started in the fluctuation effect by the super reach A and the variation effect by the normal reach A, the boy 161 (see FIG. 9A) displays the effect of the third symbol display device 81 two seconds after the start. It is displayed in the area Db. When the boy 161 is displayed, the frame button operation acceptance period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 is started, and an image (not shown) prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is displayed together with the boy 161 in the effect display area Db. .. The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and while the frame button operation acceptance period is continued, an image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is continuously displayed in the effect display area Db.

If the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the 5-second frame button operation acceptance period, the boy 161 disappears from the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the comment display 151 does not give a notice effect. Continue the variable production. On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period, the frame button operation acceptance period ends at that point, and the comment display 151 gives a notice effect.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9A, the details of the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 will be described. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151.

In the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, a balloon 162 is displayed in the effect display area Db from the image of the boy 161 previously displayed in the effect display area Db, and in the balloon 162, "premonition of a big hit ...?!" , "Maybe reach!" Is displayed.

At the time when the notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed, the variation display of the third symbol is performed so as to cover the effect display area Db, but the variation display of the third symbol at this time is a game. It is a high-speed fluctuation that cannot be visually recognized by the player, and the image displayed in the effect display area Db can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player.

In the comment display 151, the character information displayed in the balloon 161 can give a feeling of expectation that the player may hit the player. However, this character information is configured to be randomly selected when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22. That is, the character information itself of the balloon 161 does not represent the degree of expectation that will be a big hit, but is for enhancing the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, a frame (frame) 163 is provided around the balloon 162, and the display color of the frame 163 indicates the degree of expectation of a big hit. Here, with reference to FIG. 13, the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the expected degree of jackpot will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an aspect showing the degree of expectation of a big hit in each notice effect. Although FIG. 13 also shows the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, the determination upper limit value pointer 222b will be described later.

In FIG. 13, the ranks indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit are indicated by "1" to "5". The rank "1" is the rank with the lowest expectation for a big hit, and the rank "2" is the rank with the second lowest expectation for a big hit. Then, as the ranks increase to "3" and "4", the expectation of a big hit increases, and the rank "5" is a rank in which the expectation of a big hit is 100%, that is, a rank that always becomes a big hit.

Each advance notice effect executed in the variation effect by the super reach A and the variation effect by the normal reach A has five patterns, and different ranks are associated with each pattern. In each advance notice effect, by executing the effect according to one pattern selected from the five patterns, the player is given five ranks of expectation to be a big hit from the contents of the effect executed in the advance notice effect. Can be shown. The expected degree of jackpot in each rank is set to be the same regardless of the advance notice effect. That is, when the same rank of expectation is shown in one notice effect and another notice effect, the expectation shown in each notice effect is the same.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, when the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 is white, the rank "1" is shown as the expected degree. When the display color of the frame 163 is blue, the rank "2" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is red, the rank "3" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the frame 163 is a tiger pattern, the rank "4" is shown as the degree of expectation. Then, when the display color of the frame 163 is a rainbow color, the expectation degree is ranked "5" (that is, 100% jackpot).

What to do with the display color of the frame 163 of the balloon 162 is the result of the variation effect (whether it is a big hit or the miss) and the variation pattern of the variation effect (normal reach A or super reach A). When it is accepted that the frame button 22 has been operated by the player, it is randomly determined based on the above. The determination method will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the notice production is continued. In the fluctuation production by Super Reach A and the fluctuation production by Normal Reach A, a notice production is performed even during the normal reach fluctuation. Specifically, a notice effect is performed by the child character appearance 152 in which the child character appears during the normal reach fluctuation. The advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is automatically displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9B, the details of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 will be described. FIG. 9B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152.

In the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, 5 seconds after the start of the normal reach fluctuation (15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the substantially central portion of the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 8, that is, that is, A child 164 is displayed on the rear side of the middle symbol row Z2. Then, while the normal reach fluctuation is being performed, the child 164 is moved according to the movement of the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 which is scrolled at a medium speed or a low speed visible to the player, and the child 164 is as if the middle symbol. It is shown to the player as if the row Z2 is scrolling. As a result, the player watches the variable effect while watching the movement of the child 164, expecting that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, while the variable effect is being performed, the player plays the game. Can concentrate people.

Here, in the advance notice production by the child character appearance 152, the degree of expectation to be a big hit is shown by the color of the clothes 164a worn by the child 164. Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164a and the degree of expectation that will be a big hit will be described.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the advance notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152, when the color of the clothes 164a worn by the child 164 is white, the rank "1" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is blue, the rank "2" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is red, the rank "3" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the color of the clothes 164a is a tiger pattern, the rank "4" is shown as the degree of expectation. Then, when the color of the clothes 164a is rainbow, the degree of expectation is rank "5" (that is, 100% jackpot). As described above, the relationship between the color of the clothes 164a and the degree of expectation is the same as the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the degree of expectation in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151.

What to do with the color of the clothes 164a of the child 164 depends on the result of the variable effect (whether it is a big hit or a miss) and the variable pattern of the variable effect (normal reach A or super reach A). Based on the above, it is randomly determined at the time of performing the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152. The determination method will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the notice production is continued. In the variable effect by Super Reach A, a notice effect is performed even while the development image is displayed. Specifically, a notice effect is performed by the super reach selection 153 that selects the type of super reach while displaying the development image. In this super reach selection 153, the type of super reach variation (reach type) displayed following the development image is selected from five reach types according to the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. Yes, depending on the reach species selected, it indicates the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the details of the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 will be described. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. As shown in FIG. 10, in the developed image in which the advance notice effect is performed by the super reach selection 153, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner of the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed large in the effect display area Db.

The advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is started 2 seconds after the development image is displayed, that is, 32 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and displays the image shown in FIG. In this image, the treasure box 165 is displayed in the central part of the effect display area Db, and the character information "Destroy the treasure box!" Is displayed in the upper part. As a result, the player is notified that the production that will be a big hit if the treasure box can be destroyed will be performed during the super reach fluctuation. In addition, a boy 166 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area Db, a balloon is displayed from the boy 166, and text information such as "I will decide the destroyer! Press the button!" Is displayed in the balloon. In addition, an image of a child 167, an image of a man 168, an image of a witch 169, and an image of a thunder god 170 are displayed on the right side of the effect display area Db as candidates for the destroyer. Then, one of the images of the child 167, the male 168, the witch 169, and the thunder god 170 is highlighted (in FIG. 10, the child 167 is highlighted), and the highlighted images are sequentially replaced at high speed. .. As a result, the player is made to recognize that the destroyer is selected by operating the frame button operation 22.

In the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the reach type of the super reach variation performed after that is associated with each destroyer selected here. That is, the child 167 is associated with a "one-shot reach" that displays the effect that the child 167 tries to destroy the treasure box by hitting the treasure box only once during the super reach fluctuation, and the male 168 is associated with the "one-shot reach". A "continuous hit reach" that displays the effect that a male 168 tries to destroy a treasure chest by repeatedly hitting it during the super reach fluctuation is associated, and for the witch 169, the witch 169 casts magic on the treasure chest during the super reach fluctuation. The "magic reach" that is to be destroyed is associated with the thunder god 170, and the thunder god 170 is associated with the "thunder reach" that the thunder god 170 attempts to destroy by dropping lightning on the treasure box during the super reach fluctuation. Furthermore, although it is not displayed on the notice production screen by the super reach selection 153, as the reach species selected here, Buddha 172 (see FIG. 11 (b)) further chanting the sutra and opening the treasure box. There is "Buddha reach".

As mentioned above, these reach types represent the degree of expectation that will be a big hit after the fluctuation effect. Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 and the expectation degree of a big hit will be described.

As shown in FIG. 13, if the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is "one-shot reach", the rank "1" is shown as the expectation level, and if it is "continuous hit reach", the expectation level is set. Shows rank "2", if it is "magic reach", it shows rank "3" as expectation, if it is "thunder reach", it shows rank "4" as expectation, and if it is "Buddha reach" For example, rank "5" is shown as the degree of expectation. That is, "Buddha reach" is a reach species with 100% expectation of being a big hit. The image of Buddha 172 is not displayed in the notice production by Super Reach Selection 153, but by displaying this undisplayed Buddha 172 at the start of Super Reach and performing super reach fluctuation with that Buddha 172 as a motif. It can be strongly impressed that the player has developed a special reach, that is, a so-called premium reach in which the expectation for a big hit is 100%. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be greatly enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 will be continued. In terms of internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the reach type of the super reach fluctuation is set to the above-mentioned "one-shot reach" and "continuous hit" based on the timing when the player operates the frame button 22. Select from "Reach", "Magic Reach", "Thunder Reach", and "Buddha Reach". Then, the selection result is notified to the player by displaying the character image corresponding to the selected reach type in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 described later, which is performed at the start of the super reach variation. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the destroyer who destroys the treasure box is selected based on the timing when the frame button 22 is operated during the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153.

At the time of the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is the time when the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is started (that is, the image shown in FIG. 10 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It will be accepted during the frame button operation acceptance period starting from (when it is displayed). The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for a maximum of 5 seconds, and the image of FIG. 10 continues to be displayed in the effect display area Db while the frame button operation acceptance period continues.

If the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period, the frame button operation acceptance period ends at that point, and the reach types are "one-shot reach", "continuous hit reach", and so on. Select from "Magic Reach", "Thunder Reach", and "Buddha Reach". On the other hand, if the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the 5-second frame button operation acceptance period, the frame button operation acceptance period ends as it is, and at that point, the reach types are "one-shot reach" and " Select from "Continuous Strike Reach", "Magic Reach", "Thunder Reach", and "Buddha Reach".

Which reach type is selected is based on the result of the variation effect (whether it is a big hit or a miss) and the variation pattern of the variation effect (normal reach A or super reach A). Therefore, it is randomly determined when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22, or when the frame button operation acceptance period ends without the frame button 22 being operated. The determination method will be described later.

In the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the image of the destroyer corresponding to the selected reach type is not displayed immediately as described above, but is displayed by the notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach fluctuation. To do. From the end of the frame button operation acceptance period to the announcement effect by the character appearance 154, the content of the balloon of the boy 166 shown in FIG. 10 was changed to the text information "Who is the destroyer?" Above, we will continue to highlight the children 167, men 168, witches 169, and thunder god 170. As a result, until the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is displayed, the player can pay attention to the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 while giving the player a sense of expectation as to which destroyer has been selected.

Next, the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed by the variable effect by Super Reach A will be described. The notice effect by the character appearance 154 is a notice effect that is performed at the same time as the super reach change starts (develops to super reach), and the notice effect of this super reach change selected in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 that was performed earlier. The reach type is notified to the player by displaying the image of the character associated with the reach type in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. That is, the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 is selected at the time of advance notice selection by the super reach selection 153, instead of determining the rank indicating the degree of expectation of the jackpot again at the time of the advance notice effect and performing the advance notice effect in the pattern according to the rank. A notice is given according to the reach type. The advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 is automatically performed when the super reach fluctuation is started.

Here, referring to FIG. 13 again, the character displayed in the effect display area Db by the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, and the expectation degree to be a big hit. Explain the relationship between.

As shown in FIG. 13, when "one-shot reach" having an expectation rank of "1" is selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the child character is associated with the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154. At the start of the super reach fluctuation, the image of the child is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "one-shot reach" starts, and also to grasp that the rank "1" has the lowest expectation of being a big hit.

If "continuous hit reach" with an expectation rank of "2" is selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the male character is associated with the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, and the super reach fluctuation At the start, the image of the man is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "continuous hit reach" starts, and also to grasp that the expectation of a big hit is the second lowest rank "2".

If "magic reach" with an expectation rank of "3" is selected by the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the witch character is associated with the notice effect by the character appearance 154, and the super reach fluctuation At the start, the image of the witch is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "magic reach" starts, and also to grasp that the expectation of a big hit is the third highest rank "3".

If "Thunder Reach" with an expectation rank of "4" is selected by the advance notice effect by Super Reach Selection 153, the character of Raijin is associated with the advance notice effect by character appearance 154, and the super reach fluctuation At the start, the image of the thunder god is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "thunder reach" starts, and also to grasp that the expectation of a big hit is the second highest rank "4".

If "Buddha reach" with an expectation rank of "5" is selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is associated with the Buddha character, and the super reach At the start of the fluctuation, the image of the Buddha is displayed in the effect display area Db. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the super reach fluctuation due to the "Buddha reach" starts, and also to grasp that the rank "5" is expected to be a big hit with 100%.

When a predetermined character is displayed in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character is given a unique color. For example, for a child corresponding to "one-shot reach" with an expectation rank of "1", the child's clothes are displayed in "white" and "continuous hit reach" with an expectation rank of "2". For men who correspond to, the clothes of the men are displayed in "blue", and for witches who correspond to "magic reach" whose expectation rank is "3", the clothes of the witch are displayed in "red". However, for the thunder god corresponding to "thunder reach" with the expectation rank of "4", the cloth worn by the thunder god is displayed with "tiger pattern", and the expectation rank is "5" "Buddha". For Buddhas that support "reach", the afterglow that points to the Buddha is displayed as "rainbow".

That is, the relationship between the color displayed according to the character and the degree of expectation is the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 in the notice effect by the comment display 151 and the degree of expectation, and the color of the clothes 164a in the notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152. Is the same as the relationship between and the degree of expectation. Therefore, just by looking at the colors displayed in each notice effect, it is possible to grasp the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed, so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a familiar game machine.

FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, and FIG. 11A is an example in which an image of a male 171 is displayed. (B) shows an example when the image of Buddha 172 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11, even in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the variable display of the third symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the effect, and the player can pay attention to the effect. It can enhance the interest.

Further, in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the character information "The destroyer is ..." is displayed on the upper part of the effect display area Db, and the treasure box 165 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area Db. An image of a character corresponding to the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is displayed on the right side of the display area Db.

For example, when the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is "continuous hit reach", as shown in FIG. 11A, the image of the male 171 corresponding to the continuous hit reach is displayed in the effect display area Db. Display on the right side. This makes it possible for the player to understand that a reach effect in which a man tries to destroy a treasure box by repeatedly hitting it is performed, and the degree of expectation that a big hit will be obtained from the reach type that the player has grasped is ranked "2". Can be notified to the player. Also, at this time, the clothes of the clothes 171a worn by the man 171 are displayed in "blue", so even for a player who has difficulty understanding the relationship between the reach type and the jackpot expectation, the expectation of the jackpot is ranked from this color. It can be easily understood that it is "2".

In the super reach fluctuation, after that, the effect of the male 171 repeatedly hitting the treasure box 165 is displayed in the effect display area Db, and in the case of a big hit, the treasure box 165 is destroyed by the male 171 in the right symbol row Z1 and the left symbol row Z2. The same third symbol (“7” in the example of FIG. 11 (a)), which is the same as the third symbol being stopped and displayed, pops out from the treasure box 165, and it is stopped and displayed as the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. The effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the case of disengagement, the male 171 cannot destroy the treasure box 165, and the third symbol different from the third symbol displayed in the right symbol row Z1 and the left symbol row Z2 is stopped in the middle symbol row Z2. The displayed effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when the reach type selected by the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is "Buddha reach", as shown in FIG. 11B, the image of the Buddha 172 corresponding to the Buddha reach is displayed as an effect. It is displayed on the right side of the area Db. This makes it possible for the player to understand that the Buddhist chant is performed to open the treasure chest, and the expectation that the player will be a big hit from the reach type that the player has grasped is ranked "5". That is, it is possible to notify the player that it will be a 100% jackpot. Also, at this time, since the back light 172a of Buddha 172 is displayed as "Rainbow", even for players who have difficulty understanding the relationship between the reach species and the jackpot expectation, the expectation of a jackpot from this color is ranked " It can be easily understood that it is "5". Further, by displaying the image of the Buddha 172, which is not displayed in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, as described above, the player is expected to have a special reach, that is, a big hit. It can be strongly impressed that it has developed into a so-called premium reach with a degree of 100%. As a result, the player's interest in the game can be greatly enhanced.

In the super reach fluctuation, after that, the effect of the Buddha 172 chanting the sutra is displayed in the effect display area Db, and finally the treasure box 165 is opened, and the third stop display is displayed in the right symbol column Z1 and the left symbol column Z2. The third symbol (“7” in the example of FIG. 11 (a)), which is the same as the symbol, pops out of the treasure box 165 and is stopped and displayed as the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2. Displayed on the device 81.

Returning to FIG. 8, the explanation of the notice production is continued. In the fluctuation effect by Super Reach A, a cut-in 155 is further performed as a notice effect during the change in Super Reach. The cut-in 155 is displayed in the effect display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 triggered by the player instructing the operation of the frame button 22 (that is, the frame button is turned ON).

The notice effect by this cut-in 155 is displayed according to the following procedure. First, 5 seconds after the start of the super reach fluctuation (45 seconds after the start of the fluctuation), the frame button operation acceptance period for accepting the operation of the frame button 22 is started, and the effect display area Db is prompted to operate the frame button 22. (Not shown) is displayed. The frame button operation acceptance period is continued for 10 seconds, and while the frame button operation acceptance period is continued, the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is the effect display area except while the cut-in image described later is displayed. It continues to be displayed on Db.

If the frame button 22 is not operated by the player during the 10-second frame button operation acceptance period, the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is deleted from the effect display area Db, and the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 is not performed. Continue the variable production. On the other hand, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image described later is displayed in the effect display area Db for 1 second at that time. In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation of the frame button 22 can be accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation of the frame button 22 is accepted. ..

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the details of the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 will be described. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing a cut-in image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155.

As shown in FIG. 12, even in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed small in the upper left corner (see FIG. 10) of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 can be displayed in the effect display area Db without being affected by the variable display of the third symbol, so that the player can pay attention to the effect, and the player can draw attention to the effect. It can enhance the interest.

In the notice effect by the cut-in 155, the character's right eye 173 displayed in the notice effect by the character appearance 154 is zoomed up and displayed in the notice effect area Db, and the cut-in frame 174 is produced so as to surround the zoomed-up right eye. Display in the display area Db. In the notice production by the cut-in 155, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 indicates the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the expected degree of jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is white, the rank "1" is shown as the expected degree. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is blue, the rank "2" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is red, the rank "3" is shown as the degree of expectation. When the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is a tiger pattern, the rank "4" is shown as the expected degree. Then, when the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is a rainbow color (rainbow), the expected degree is ranked "5" (that is, 100% jackpot).

In this way, the relationship between the display color of the cut-in frame 174 and the expectation level that becomes a big hit is the relationship between the display color of the frame 163 and the expectation level in the notice production by the comment display 151, and the clothes in the notice production by the child character appearance 152. The relationship between the color of 164a and the degree of expectation is the same as the relationship between the color displayed together with the character and the degree of expectation in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154. Therefore, just by looking at the colors displayed in each notice effect, it is possible to grasp the expectation that will be a big hit in the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed, so that the player can be informed of the degree of expectation in an easy-to-understand manner. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to provide a familiar game machine.

The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined once each time the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22, and a cut-in image including the cut-in frame 174 displayed in the determined display color is produced and displayed. Display in area Db. That is, each time the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is given, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 of the cut-in image displayed according to the operation is determined. As a result, the player can operate the frame button 22 many times while expecting that the expectation of a big hit will be high. Therefore, the player can be actively participated in the game even while the variable effect is being performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

What to do with the display color of the cut-in frame 174 depends on the result of the variable effect (whether it is a big hit or a miss) and the variable pattern of the variable effect (normal reach A or super reach). Based on A or), it is randomly determined at each timing when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received. The determination method will be described later.

As described above, the variation effect by the super reach A and the variation effect by the normal reach A are configured to perform the advance notice effect a plurality of times during the variation effect. In addition, in the variable effect by the super reach A, which has a longer variable time than the normal reach A, more notice effects are performed. If the fluctuation time of the variation effect is long, the player may get bored until the stop display is displayed. However, by executing many advance notice effects, the player will be hit by a big hit every time the advance notice effect is displayed. You can have a sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and to make the player continue to play the game.

In addition, each notice effect has five patterns, and different expectations are associated with each pattern. Then, which pattern is used for the advance notice effect is determined by the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 and the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22 and the child character appears 152. In the above, at the time when the advance notice effect is started, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, at the time when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22, or during the frame button operation acceptance period for receiving the operation instruction of the frame button 22 At the end, it will be decided randomly.

Here, the pattern of each notice production is not determined collectively, but is determined separately for each of the following reasons. That is, when the patterns are collectively determined, it is necessary to store in advance the combination of patterns to be set for each advance notice effect in the ROM 222. If many combinations of patterns to be set for each advance notice effect are stored in the ROM 222, it is possible to execute a plurality of advance notice effects during one variable effect with a wider variety of pattern combinations. However, if an attempt is made to store too many combinations of patterns in the ROM 222, a large storage capacity is required, and a large capacity ROM 222 is required. On the other hand, if the pattern is determined separately for each advance notice effect, a plurality of advance notices can be made during one variable effect by combining various patterns without having to store the combination of patterns set for the advance notice effect in ROM 222. The production can be executed.

In addition, in each notice effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which pattern is to be selected from the five patterns is randomly determined. Has the following reasons. If the pattern of the notice effect is determined in advance before the frame button operation acceptance period, the expectation level of the jackpot shown in the notice effect will be the same regardless of the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated. Therefore, the player does not feel that the timing of operating the frame button 22 is very important, so that the frame button 22 may be operated indiscriminately. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which pattern is to be selected from the five patterns is randomly determined, so that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received according to the reception timing. The pattern to be selected will change, and the player can be given the impression that the degree of expectation of a big hit indicated by the advance notice effect changes at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated. As a result, it is possible to induce the player to operate the frame button 22 while considering the timing of operating the frame button 22.

Further, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 and the cut-in 155, if the frame button 22 is not operated during the frame button operation acceptance period, the player is not notified of the expectation of a big hit. Therefore, in the comment display 151 and the cut-in 155, which may not notify the expectation of a big hit, even if the pattern is determined at the stage when the frame button 22 is not operated, the determination may be wasted. There is. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is received, which pattern is to be selected from the five patterns is randomly determined, so that the player is notified of the expected degree of big hit. The pattern is determined only for. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being performed.

By the way, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect in this way, the pattern of each advance notice effect is not determined in advance, but when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22. If each pattern of the advance notice effect is determined separately, such as when the advance notice effect is started, the following problems occur.

That is, if the pattern of each notice effect is determined separately, after the expectation level of a high rank jackpot is shown in one notice effect, the lower rank in another notice effect in the same variable effect is shown. In some cases, the degree of expectation that will be a big hit is shown. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

In order to solve such a problem, the pachinko machine 10 will be used in the next notice production (subsequent notice production) when the expectation level of a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production. , When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank is not selected. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, and the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is accepted, and the cut-in is displayed. Each time an image is displayed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of a big hit, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, a certain cut-in image ranks first. When the expectation of the jackpot is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of the jackpot than the one rank is not selected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Hereinafter, returning to FIG. 5, when the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment shows the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank in a certain advance notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect (subsequent notice effect). ) Describes a specific configuration in which, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation that is a big hit than the one rank is not selected.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 has the advance notice effect counter 223d, the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the frame button operation flag 223g in the RAM 223, and has the determination upper limit value pointer 222b in the ROM 222. ..

The advance notice effect counter 223d is a counter for determining one pattern to be performed in the advance notice effect from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is performed during the variable effect. .. The advance notice effect counter 223d is periodically updated (in the present embodiment, in the process of S1913 executed every 1 ms in the main process (see FIG. 30)). The notice effect counter 223d is composed of a loop counter, and the update is performed by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value (99). Is done by. Further, the initial value "0" is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on.

As described above, the player accepts the operation instruction of the frame button 22 in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 and the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155 to determine which pattern to perform the advance notice effect from the five patterns. At that time, in the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, at the time when the advance notice effect is started, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, when the player receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22 or the frame button 22 Frame button for accepting operation instructions Performed at the end of the operation acceptance period. The advance notice effect counter 223d is referred to by the MPU 221 at the timing of determining the pattern for performing the advance notice effect for each advance notice effect, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d at that timing and the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed (whether it becomes a big hit). The pattern of the advance notice effect is determined from the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b determined from the variation pattern (normal reach A or super reach A) of the variation effect.

Since the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is an effect that is automatically performed, the pattern may be determined by the time the advance notice effect is executed. For example, at the start of the variable effect. It seems that the pattern of the advance notice production may be decided. However, in the present embodiment, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the rank is less expected to be a big hit than the pattern selected in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 performed before that. The corresponding pattern should be deselected. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined at the start of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 after the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed. However, if the pattern of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is determined after the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 is performed and before the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 is started, the determination timing is arbitrary. It may be.

Here, as for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d, the value of the first predetermined number from "0" is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of becoming a jackpot, and the value of the second predetermined number from the next value is the jackpot. The expectation is assigned to the second highest rank. Then, the value "99" of the advance notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" having the lowest expectation of being a big hit.

The determination upper limit value pointer 222b is the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d for each pattern when selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect based on the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d. It is a pointer that gives the upper limit of the judgment for.

When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the MPU 221 sets the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern and the advance notice effect counter 223d at that time in order from the pattern corresponding to the rank with the highest expectation of being a big hit. Compare with the value. Then, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the pattern of a certain rank, the pattern of that rank is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

For example, when the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b is "9" for the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" having the highest expectation of a big hit, the upper limit of the judgment of the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" is set. If the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 9 or less as "9", the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" is selected as the advance notice effect pattern. On the other hand, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 10 or more, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" having the next highest expectation is compared with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d. To do.

Here, when the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is "49" with respect to the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot corresponds to the rank "4", the upper limit value of the judgment of the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" is set to ". As "49", when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 49 or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" is selected as the advance notice effect pattern. When the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 9 or less, the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" has already been selected as the advance notice effect pattern, so that the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is actually 10 or more to 49. When the following, the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 50 or more, the judgment upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is "3", "2", and "1" in this order. When the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b given to the pattern of a certain rank by comparing the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d, the pattern of that rank is determined. Select as a notice production pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13 again, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d given to each of the five patterns prepared for each notice effect in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d given to each pattern in each notice effect of the comment display 151, the child character appearance 152, the super reach selection 153, the character appearance 154, and the cut-in 155 is any of them. Is the same. As a result, the degree of expectation that each pattern will be a big hit will be the same in any notice production. In this way, by assuming that the expectation level of the jackpot indicated by each pattern is the same in all the advance notice effects, the rank of the expectation degree of the jackpot is the same for each advance notice effect performed during one variable effect. When performed in a pattern, it is possible to impress the player that the degree of expectation that will be a big hit has not changed in each notice production, and one notice production performed during one fluctuation production is that. If the rank of the expectation level that is a big hit is performed in a higher pattern than the previous notice production, it is possible to impress the player that the expectation level that is a big hit has increased.

On the other hand, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d given to each pattern is that the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d is the result of the fluctuation effect (whether it is a big hit or the deviation) in which the advance notice effect is performed and the variation pattern of the variation effect. It depends on (normal reach A or super reach A).

When the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "big hit", the judgment is made for the pattern in which the expectation degree of the big hit indicates rank "5" in each advance notice effect regardless of the variation pattern of the variable effect. "9" is given as the upper limit pointer 223d, and "49" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "4", and the expectation degree of jackpot is rank "3". "69" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern shown, and "49" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose jackpot expectation is rank "4", and the jackpot expectation is expected. Gives "99" as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to the pattern indicating the rank "1".

When the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A", the degree of expectation of a big hit indicates rank "4" in each advance notice effect. "19" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern, and "29" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern whose jackpot expectation is rank "3", and the jackpot expectation is "49" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern showing the rank "2", and "99" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose expectation degree of big hit shows the rank "1". However, in this case, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d is not given to the pattern whose expected degree of jackpot is rank "5", and the pattern of that rank "5" is not selected. ..

In addition, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", the expectation degree of a big hit is ranked "3" in each advance notice effect. "1" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the indicated pattern, and "9" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose jackpot expectation is rank "2", and the jackpot expectation is Gives "99" as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern indicating the rank "1". However, in this case, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 223d is not given to the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot indicates the ranks "5" and "4", and the pattern of the ranks "5" and "4" is not given. Is not selected.

In this way, by giving the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d to each pattern of the advance notice effect, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is a "big hit", the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 0 to 9. If it is in the range, the pattern of rank "5" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 10 to 49, the pattern of rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect. If the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 69, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 70 to 84, the rank "3" is selected. If the pattern of "2" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 85 to 99, the pattern of rank "1" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

Further, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A", if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 0 to 19, If the pattern of rank "4" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 20 to 29, the pattern of rank "3" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect and the advance notice effect counter 223d. If the value of is in the range of 30 to 49, the pattern of rank "2" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 50 to 99, the pattern of rank "1" is selected. Selected as a notice production pattern.

Further, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is 0 or 1, the rank "3" Is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in the range of 2 to 9, the pattern of rank “2” is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is set. If it is in the range of 10 to 99, the pattern of rank "1" is selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

As a result, the lower the rank of the pattern, the easier it is to select when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "off", and the higher the rank of the pattern, the more the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is a "big hit". It is easier to select in the case of. In particular, the pattern of rank "5" is selected only when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "big hit". Therefore, the lower the rank of the pattern, the lower the expectation of a big hit, and the higher the rank of the pattern, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Then, for the pattern of rank "5", the expectation of a big hit is 100%.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13, by giving the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 223d to each pattern of the advance notice effect, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off", the variation of the change effect. If the pattern is "Super Reach A", it is easier to select a pattern with a higher rank, that is, a pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, as a pattern of a notice production, and a level with a high expectation of a big hit. The pattern of "4" is selected only when the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A".

As a result, if the advance notice effect is performed at rank "4" in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 or the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 performed at the stage of high-speed fluctuation or normal reach fluctuation, the player develops into super reach. In addition, even if the advance notice effect is not performed at rank "4", if the advance notice effect is performed with a higher rank pattern, the player can increase the expectation of developing into super reach. Therefore, with respect to the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 or the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 performed after the start of the variable effect, not only the degree of expectation for the jackpot but also the degree of expectation for the super reach can be expressed. Players can also be interested in the advance notice production that is performed early after the production is started.

The determination rank counter 223e is a counter used in the process of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, and when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b for comparing with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is a big hit. Since the patterns with the highest expectation ranks are given in order, the ranks of the patterns giving the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b are counted in order from the highest rank.

The determination rank counter 223e is set to an initial value at the start of the advance notice effect rank determination process (FIG. 36), which is a process of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect (S2140). The initial value is the rank with the highest degree of expectation among the ranks of the degree of expectation that will be a big hit in which the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared in the determination.

For example, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "big hit", the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared from the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" of the expectation degree of the big hit. Therefore, "5" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. If the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variable pattern of the variable effect is "super reach A", the judgment is made from the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" of the expectation degree that is a big hit. Since the upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared, "4" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e. If the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variable pattern of the variable effect is "normal reach A", the judgment upper limit is determined from the pattern corresponding to the rank "3" of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit. Since the value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared, "3" is set as the initial value of the determination rank counter 223e.

In the advance notice effect rank determination process, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b (see FIG. 13) of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e is compared with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d (S2141 in FIG. 36). S2142). Then, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is not equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b, that is, is larger than the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b, the value of the judgment rank counter 223e is subtracted by 1 and the subtraction is performed again. The value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b (see FIG. 13) of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is compared with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d.

On the other hand, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, the rank pattern indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at that time is determined as the advance notice effect pattern. When the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e, that is, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the determined pattern and the type of the advance notice effect that determines the pattern of the advance notice effect (comment display 151, A notice effect command including information indicating the child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, or cut-in 155) is transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, during the variable effect being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the advance notice effect of the type indicated by the information included in the advance notice effect command is of the rank indicated by the information included in the advance notice effect command. Depending on the pattern, it can be displayed in the advance notice effect area Db of the third symbol display device 81.

Further, after the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the next determination of the pattern of the advance notice effect, that is, until the next advance notice effect rank determination process is executed. To. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice according to the advance notice effect of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e, and also controls the lamp display.

Further, in the advance notice production by the character appearance 154, as described above, the pattern of the advance notice effect itself is not determined, but the pattern determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 performed immediately before. Preliminary production will be performed with the same rank pattern. Here, after the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is maintained until the next determination of the pattern of the advance notice effect is performed. Therefore, when performing the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, As the value of the determination rank counter 223e, the value of the determination rank counter 223e when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is maintained. Therefore, when performing the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, only the advance notice effect is performed by the pattern of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at that time, and it is the same as the pattern determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. It is possible to perform a notice production with a rank pattern.

When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the second pointer 223f does not select a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. It is a pointer for

The second pointer 223f is set to "99", which is the maximum value that the advance notice effect counter 223e can take, as an initial value when the variation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is started (S2113 in FIG. 33). ). Then, each time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in one variation effect, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the second pointer 223f (FIG. 36). S2144).

As described above, when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b (see FIG. 13) of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d. A comparison is performed (S2141, S2142 in FIG. 36), but when it is determined in the comparison that the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b, the value of the judgment rank counter 223e is set to 1. Before subtraction (S2147 in FIG. 36), the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at that time is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f (S2145 in FIG. 36). , S2146). As a result, when the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, the rank indicated by the value of the judgment rank counter 223e at that time (the value of the judgment rank counter 223e before subtracting 1). The pattern of is determined as the pattern of the advance notice production.

When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, the pattern of the same rank as the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is used in the advance notice effect previously performed in the same variation effect. It means that it has been decided. When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal as in the present embodiment, the rank pattern indicated by the value of the judgment rank counter 223e is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect. By configuring, when the expectation level that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain advance notice effect during the variable effect, in the next advance notice effect (subsequent advance notice effect), when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, It is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation that the jackpot is higher than the one rank.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expectation degree of becoming a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain advance notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is shown. In (subsequent advance notice production), when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree that is a big hit than the one rank. Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of the jackpot, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a certain cut-in image. When is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, every time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when a new pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, a certain rank is determined by determining the rank pattern indicated by the value of the judgment rank counter 223e as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Even if the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is not changed so that the pattern of the rank lower than that rank is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect each time the pattern of The value can be used to deselect a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for each type of non-selected rank, the storage capacity required for storing the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect.

The frame button operation flag 223g is a flag indicating that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player has been accepted. When it is on, it indicates that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 has been accepted by the player, and when it is off, it indicates that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 has been accepted. The other is shown in.

The initial value "off" of the frame button operation flag 223g is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the startup process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on. Then, in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A, the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation acceptance period provided in each notice effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155. Is accepted, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123 in FIG. 34). In the MPU 221, in each of the notice effects of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, the notice effect rank determination process is executed when the frame button operation flag 223 g is turned on, and the notice effect pattern is set. Determine (S2135 in FIG. 35). Further, the frame button operation flag 223g is set to off in accordance with the execution of the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2134 in FIG. 35). As a result, in each advance notice effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, and the advance notice is given by the determined pattern. You can produce.

The RAM 223 also indicates a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and whether or not to start variable display. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 32) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command. Further, the fluctuation start flag is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control device 110 is received (see S2004 in FIG. 32), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2102 in FIG. 33).

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a vibration sensor 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and receives the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. As described above, in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A, during the frame button operation acceptance period provided in each notice effect by the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, the frame button 22 by the player When the operation instruction is received, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, and the advance notice effect is performed according to the determined pattern. Further, when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 during the period when the variation effect is not executed, the voice output device 226 and the lamp are changed so as to change the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display device 227 is controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The vibration sensor 228 is a sensor for detecting the vibration applied to the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the back surface of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10, since entering the ball into the entrance is an important factor in determining the game state, the flow of the ball is changed by vibration to prevent the ball from being intentionally entered into the entrance. There is a need. Therefore, when it is determined from the output of the vibration sensor 228 that the pachinko machine 10 has been vibrated by a player or the like, an error command for transmitting the vibration error is transmitted to the display control device 114. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and issues an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. It controls the production) and the advance notice production. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the model having exactly the same symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is available. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM (for example, a conventional game machine) like a conventional game machine. , ROM 22) described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598 is not provided and stored, but is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 187, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, the character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. .. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. Further, the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 is resident in which the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the video RAM 235 for normal use or the video RAM 236 for normal use.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are displayed in the third symbol without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) unlike the conventional game machine. Since the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the device 81 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the number of parts can be increased. It is possible to suppress an increase in the failure rate due to the above.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Data address conversion (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) is executed.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 187a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to output the data after the address is specified in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , Fixed value data used in the control program (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc., which will be described later), by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of NAND flash memory 234a), work RAM 233. It is programmed to transfer to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233c according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads various control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. The process can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, additional data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all used. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see FIG. 37 (a)) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 37 (a)) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed (FIG. 37 (Fig. 37). Set the start address of the program corresponding to (see S2202) in a).

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. , MPU231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 187a2 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 38B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 435 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is provided with at least a main image area 235a when the power is turned on, a variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, a rear image area 235c, a third symbol area 235d, a character symbol area 235e, and an error message image area 235f. ..

Similar to the power-on main image area 189a of the first embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a is from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, which is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 164 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a fluctuating image when the power is turned on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a fluctuating effect.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2203 and S2204 in FIG. 37 (a)).

Here, a variation image when the power is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 15, immediately after the power is turned on by the display control device 114, the power is turned on displayed by the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234. It is explanatory drawing explaining the time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power-on, and the main image at power-on shown in FIG. 15 (a). The image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 15B. As shown in FIG. 15 (c), on the display screen of the main image when the power is turned on, a "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and a "○" as shown in FIG. 15 (c). At the same position as the symbol, the image of the "x" symbol that fluctuates when the power is turned on is displayed alternately and repeatedly during the fluctuation period. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit", the image shown in FIG. 15 (b) is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "off", the image shown in FIG. 15 (c) is displayed in the variation effect. Display for a certain period after stopping.

The MPU 231 used the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 was transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs the drawing of the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. it can.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry into the first entrance ball 264 is detected, the fluctuating image area at power-on The power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in 235b, and the images shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If an entry is detected in the first entrance ball 264 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the back image area 189b of the first embodiment. Here, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. 16 and 17 are explanatory views for explaining the three types of rear images and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image. FIG. 16 (b) is for the back surface B corresponding to the "empty stage", and FIG. 17 is for the back surface C corresponding to the "island stage". They are shown below.

Of the back surfaces A to C, as shown in FIG. 16, the rear image corresponding to the back surfaces A and B is a character whose image is longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is prepared in ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter, referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the width of the display area in the horizontal direction, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The back image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to "city stage" or "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c in a smooth connection so as to flow toward the left.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, the rear image on the back surface C is displayed in the order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) → ... In FIG. 17 with the passage of time. Displayed on device 281. Specifically, on the back surface C, the image of the mountain towering over the island, the image of the sandy beach spreading at the foot of the mountain, and the image of the sea surrounding the island are displayed in a fixed position. It is displayed on the display device 81. On the other hand, the color tone of the sky image spreading on the mountain changes with the passage of time.

When the stage is changed to the "island stage" by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player, the rear image shown in FIG. 17A is displayed as the initial rear image of the rear surface C. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17A, an orange sky indicating a sunrise is displayed. Then, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from orange to bright blue, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 17B is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17B, a bright blue sky indicating daytime is displayed. Next, the color tone of the sky gradually changes from bright blue to black with the passage of time, and after a predetermined time elapses, the back image shown in FIG. 17C is displayed. In the rear image shown in FIG. 17 (c), a black sky indicating night is displayed. After that, with the passage of time, the color tone of the sky gradually begins to turn white from black and then changes to orange. Then, after the lapse of a predetermined time, the image returns to the back image shown in FIG. 17A, and the back images of FIGS. 17A to 17C are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 again.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 16A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, has the entire range of the back surface A, that is, all the image data corresponding to the position a to the position d is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often performed without changing the stage while displaying the city stage, which is the initial stage, so all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making the character ROM 234 resident, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface area, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the back image area 235c of. Further, the back surface C corresponding to the island stage includes FIG. 17 (a), and the image data corresponding to the back image between FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) excluding FIG. 17 (b) is obtained after the power is turned on. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and is resident in the start-up process.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes the resident video RAM 235 very much. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is set to the range from the position a to the position a'or the range of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b). It is fixed, and the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b including the initial position or the image between FIGS. 17A to 17B is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the rear image area of the resident video RAM 235 when the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. By using the image data resident in 235c, the initial positions of the back surface B and the back surface C are immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the scroll display or the color tone is changed with the passage of time. be able to. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the range of images is stored in the back surface B and the back surface C, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236. As a result, the image data from position b'to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from position a to position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

Similarly, on the back surface C, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. While the image data of the images corresponding to FIGS. 17 (b) to 17 (c) and 17 (c) to 17 (a) can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236, FIG. 17 (a) is shown. The range of ~ (b) is set. As a result, while displaying the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b), the image data corresponding to the images of FIGS. 17 (b) to (c) and 17 (c) to (a) can be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Since the images can be transferred to, the images of FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b) are displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Using the image data corresponding to the back image, the images of FIGS. 17 (b) to (c) and 17 (c) to (a) can be sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time. it can.

On the back surface B and the back surface C, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 14) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the back surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the display area by using the image data of the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. To do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left in a smooth connection.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, are resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 187 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 187a is used for the character ROM 187, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without a number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as in the first embodiment. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10, similarly to the error message image area 189e of the first embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of the vibration sensor 228 attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 displays the occurrence of a vibration error by an error command. Notify 114. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 435. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

As described above, the normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, an additional data table buffer 233e, a transfer data table buffer 233f, a pointer 233g, a drawing list area 233h, and a timing counter. It has at least 233i, a stored image discrimination flag 233j, and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a main control. For the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to one effect based on the command from the device 110, it is displayed by the additional data table and the display data table that describe the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time. This is an area for storing the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in the production.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using the 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a demo effect. , A display data table corresponding to the final display effect and the restart effect is prepared.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

Further, the final display effect is a third symbol display device when the stop symbol is confirmed and displayed by receiving a confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the fluctuation effect. This is the effect displayed on 81. For example, when the stop symbol is a missed symbol, an effect of emphasizing the miss is performed, and when the stop symbol is either a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 15R normal jackpot, or a 2R probability variation jackpot, each jackpot is emphasized. The production is done. By visually recognizing this definite display effect, the player can easily determine the game value given by the content of the stop symbol.

Further, the restart effect is centered on the predetermined position when the confirmation command transmitted from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect. This is an effect of displaying an image obtained by vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. When the player visually recognizes that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the stopped symbol is not determined at that time. Can be recognized.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the demo effect, the final display effect, and the restart effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Further, in the variation display data table, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, for example, variation. A display pattern table for special variation is also prepared, which is used when the stop symbol of the detachment is instructed by the main control device 110 when the effect pattern is a variation effect pattern for hitting. This special variation causes the third symbol to be variablely displayed at high speed until the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, and the confirmation command is received. In accordance with the above, a special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "3", "4", or "1" in order from the left column) is determined as a stop symbol.

When the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the line on the main control device 110. There is a risk that it will not be possible to correctly reflect the results of the lottery and perform variable effects and final display effects. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation is displayed, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Further, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Information on effects and characters is defined as one or more according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in the start address "0000H" of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 18). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233g is initialized. Then, each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, the pointer 233g is added by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233 g, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

The details of the additional data table will then be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of an additional data table. As described above, the additional data table describes the display contents to be displayed with the passage of time with respect to the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect based on the command from the main control device 110. It was done. Here, "adding to one effect" means changing the display content of one effect based on a command from the main control device 110, for example, adding or deleting another image to one effect. It includes the concept of displaying the image, changing a part or all of the color tone in the one effect, and changing the image displayed in the one effect.

That is, the additional data table is the drawing content required to add or delete a new image for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. , The drawing content required to change the color tone of a part or all of the one effect, and the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in the one effect are defined. Is.

In this embodiment, the advance notice effect is additionally displayed in addition to the variation effect displayed by the variation display data table selected based on the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) from the main control device 110. The case where the display content for displaying is specified by the additional data table will be described.

That is, the additional data table is prepared, for example, in response to the advance notice effect additionally displayed for the variable effect, specifically, the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, and Five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the five patterns prepared for the notice effect by the character appearance 154, and the notice effect by the cut-in 155. An additional data table corresponding to each of the five patterns prepared for is stored in the data table storage area 233b.

In this additional data table, the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame to be additionally displayed at the time indicated by the address is specified in detail in correspondence with the address specified in the display data table. In the drawing contents, the type of the sprite is specified for each sprite that should be additionally displayed in the image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the rotation angle are defined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, for two effects (effect 1, effect 2) and two characters (character 1, character 2) in association with the address "0907H" defined in the display data table, respectively. Sprite type (effect type, character type), display position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information are specified.

In addition, in the additional data table, the content of the image to be deleted from the image to be displayed at the time indicated by the address by the display data table corresponding to the address specified in the display data table Is also specified. In this case, the address of the emergence data table defines the type of sprite to be deleted and displayed, and the information indicating that the sprite is to be deleted.

On the other hand, if there is no display to be added or deleted at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no display to be added corresponding to the address in the additional data table. Null data, which means that, is specified (corresponding to the address "0001H" in FIG. 19).

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the additional data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the additional data table (in the example of FIG. 19 in the example of FIG. 19). In "00FDH"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, drawing corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the additional data table is drawn. The contents are described.

When the MPU 231 receives the advance notice effect command from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 reads an additional data table corresponding to the type and pattern of the advance notice effect indicated by the advance notice effect command from the data table storage area 233b, and reads the additional data table corresponding to the advance notice effect command from the data table storage area 233b, and the work RAM 233 described later. It is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image content to be drawn next. If a sprite to be deleted is specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, a drawing list is created without including the sprite, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image.

For example, in the example of FIG. 19, when the pointer 233g becomes "097H", the MPU 231 is specified in the address "0907H" of the additional data table in various sprites specified in the address "097H" of the display data table. Each sprite of the effect 1, effect 2, character 1, and character 2 is added to create a drawing list, and the image controller 237 is instructed to draw the image. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0001H", it is determined that there is no display object to be added because the Null data is specified in the address "0001H" of the additional data table, and the address "0001H" of the display data table is determined. A drawing list is generated based on various sprites specified in "0001H". Further, when the information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table is "End" information, or when the pointer 233g indicates an address not specified in the additional data table (for example). , In the example of FIG. 19, even when the pointer 233g indicates an address after "00FEH"), it is determined that there is no display object to be added, and drawing is performed based on various sprites specified in the display data table. Generate a list.

Then, by transmitting the generated drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, according to the update of the pointer 233g, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the drawing contents specified in the additional data table are added or deleted. Therefore, the display data table and the additional data table are added or deleted. The image as defined in the above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 is assigned according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. 3 In addition to the effect image to be displayed on the symbol display device 81 (for example, a variable effect image), another image (for example, a notice effect image) is displayed, or a specific image is deleted from the effect image to be displayed. By setting the additional data table buffer 233e to the additional data table buffer 233e, which is expected to be displayed by adding or deleting the additional image, the additional image can be easily added to the base production image and displayed. Or you can have the deleted image deleted from the base image. As a result, for example, when there are 32 types of original effect images and there are 5 types of other effect images to be additionally displayed, a display in which an image in which other effect images are superimposed for each original effect image is defined. If a data table is prepared separately, 32 x (1 + 5) = 192 types of display data tables must be prepared. However, like this pachinko machine 10, a data table corresponding to other production images is used as an additional data table. By separately specifying, 32 + 5 = 37 types of displays and additional data tables may be prepared, and an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the data table corresponding to various kinds of effect modes in the capacity prepared in the data table storage area 233b, and it is possible to easily further diversify the effect images.

Further, by defining another effect image to be additionally displayed as an additional data table as in the pachinko machine 10, after setting the display data table corresponding to the original effect image in the display data table buffer 233d, Even if it is decided to display another effect image to be additionally displayed, an additional data table corresponding to the other effect image is added without changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. By simply setting the data table buffer 233e, other effect images to be additionally displayed can be added to the original effect image and easily displayed.

Further, since the additional data table has the same data structure as the display data table, the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data set in the additional data table buffer 233e While updating the pointer 233g every hour from the table, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer can be easily specified, and one drawing list corresponding to one frame can be easily specified from these. Can be generated in. Therefore, even if the display of other effects is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the like in addition to the effects performed based on the command from the main control device 110, the effects to be additionally displayed should be displayed. By defining the display contents in the additional data table, it is possible to easily perform a wide variety of effect display from a small number of data tables.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 20). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

For example, in the variable effect by Super Reach A and the variable effect by Normal Reach A, each notice effect is performed by comment display 151, child character 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, and cut-in 155 in the middle of the variable effect. Therefore, in the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table that defines the display of the variation effect by the super reach A and the display of the variation effect by the normal reach A, the image data of the image that can be displayed in each advance notice effect is displayed by the advance notice effect. The transfer data information of the image data is defined so that the image data is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time it is started.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 20).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 20, in the example of FIG. 20). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233g is updated, the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g are drawn from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. In addition to creating a drawing list (see FIG. 21) that will be specified and described later, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to start transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Is acquired and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list.

For example, in the example of FIG. 20, when the pointer 233g becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table to the display data table and the additional data table. It is added to the drawing list created based on the basis, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233g is "0002H", since the Null data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Therefore, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is displayed. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 14, the description will be continued. The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C on the third symbol display device 81. It is a flag to indicate. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , Is set to on in the main process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. 37 (a)) (see S2205 in FIG. 37 (a)). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S3105 in FIG. 49 (b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 38), and the simple image display flag is displayed. When 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 38 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 38 (b)) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. ) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3001 in FIG. 49 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 49 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233g one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, is generated in which the contents of instructions for drawing an image are described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The additional data table buffer 233e is additionally displayed in addition to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. It is a buffer for storing an additional data table corresponding to the effect (notice effect, etc.). The MPU 231 stores the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and temporarily writes the Null data, which means that there is no display object to be added to the additional data table buffer 233e, to display the data table. Clear the contents.

After that, the MPU 231 is added to the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d based on a command or the like from the voice lamp control device 113. If there is an effect that determines the presence or absence and additionally displays it, an additional data table corresponding to the effect mode is selected from the data table storage area 233b, and the selected additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e. Store.

Then, the MPU 231 is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e and the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d while adding the pointer 233g one by one. Based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional data table, a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 is generated for each frame. .. As a result, the effect corresponding to the additional data table is additionally displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Further, when the additional data table is not stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, since the All data is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the third symbol display device 81 has an effect corresponding to the display data table. Is displayed as it is.

The transfer data table buffer 233f is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233f. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233f.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233 g in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while adding the pointer 233 g one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later, which describes the instruction content for drawing an image to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233g is a drawing content or a transfer target image from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. Data transfer This is to specify the address from which data information should be acquired. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233g to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S2403 in FIG. 38). (See), the pointer update process (see S2711 in FIG. 44) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233g is added one by one.

The MPU 231 has an address indicated by the pointer 233g from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e each time the pointer 233g is updated. A predetermined sprite that should start transfer at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f while specifying the drawing contents specified in 1 and creating a drawing list (see FIG. 21) described later. Acquires the transfer data information of the image data of, and adds the transfer data information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the additional data table is stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, the effect is displayed. The effect corresponding to the additional data table can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the effect corresponding to the display data table. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed by simply changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. .. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 341.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233h is generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 21, a back image and a third symbol (designs 1,) used in the image of one frame. Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The MPU 231 is a display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and an additional data table stored in the additional data table buffer 233e. Detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw one frame of image based on the contents of (for example, a hold image that displays a hold ball number symbol, a warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.) ) Is generated, and the drawing list is created by sorting the detailed information for each sprite.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are specified from the sprite type specified in the display data table and the additional data table and the contents of other images. It is generated according to the sprite type. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 can be adjusted according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 displays a display data table and additional data for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy the information specified in the table as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...). , Character (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol), detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described.

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233f at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233i is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (see FIG. 38). Each time the display setting process of is executed, the timekeeping counter 233i is decremented by 1 (see S2713 in FIG. 44). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The storage image determination flag 233j indicates whether the image data corresponding to the sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not.

The stored image discrimination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S2202 in FIG. 37 (a)) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image discrimination flag 233j generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image discrimination flag 233j when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the image of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3216 in FIG. 50). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3217 in FIG. 50). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3302 in FIG. 51).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233k, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 38) is executed (see S3302 in FIG. 51).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 28. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 ms). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. The main process will be described.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S1101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S1103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 899, 99, 99, 250), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S1104), and then the first ball entry port is executed. The start winning process accompanying the winning of 64 is executed (S1105). The details of the variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, respectively.

After executing the start winning process, the launch control process is executed (S1106), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S1107) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the ball is launched on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the variation processing (S1104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S1104). This fluctuation processing (S1104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and controls the fluctuation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In this fluctuation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S1201). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S1201: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

If it is not a big hit (S1201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. (S1202: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S1203). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: No), this process is terminated as it is. As a result, the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1204, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped (S1203: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110) Is greater than 0 (S1204), and if the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is not 0 (S1204: Yes), the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number). N) is subtracted by 1 (S1205), and the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S1206). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c toward the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area 203c to the execution area side in order. → The data in each area is shifted in the order of hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area. After the data shift processing, the fluctuation start processing of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1207). The fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

In the process of S1204, when it is determined that the value of the hold ball counter 203a (hold ball number N) is 0 (S1204: No), a state in which the demonstration effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81, that is, , Determining whether or not the demo is in progress (S1208). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (hold ball number N) is larger than 0. Determine the interval as being demoed.

Then, if it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S1208: No), a demo command is set (S1209), this process is terminated, and if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S1208: Yes), This process ends as it is. The demo command set in the process of S1209 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 28) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits this demo command as it is to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display the demo effect according to the demo command.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the fluctuation display is not started when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo command can be set and the demo effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S1202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed (S1210). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time elapses. If not (S1210: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S1211), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, the display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

The variation processing is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the variation processing is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the fluctuation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S1210: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S1212). The stop symbol is set in advance by the fluctuation start process (S1207) described later with reference to FIG. 24. That is, by the processing of S1206, whether or not it is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c, and if it is a big hit, the first hit type. Depending on the value of the counter C2, a symbol that becomes a 15R probability variation jackpot after a jackpot (a probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds) or a 2R probability variation jackpot (a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds) It is determined whether the symbol is a probability variation jackpot that shifts to (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state) or a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds).

In the present embodiment, the blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variation jackpot is reached after the jackpot, the red LED is lit when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and the red LED and blue are lit when the 15R normal jackpot is reached. Turn on the LED. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S1212, the stop symbol of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. A confirmation command is set (S1213) to confirm the process, and this process ends. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the confirmation command to the display control device 114 as it is. The fluctuation of the third symbol display device 81 stops when the fluctuation time elapses, and the stop symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is confirmed by receiving the confirmation command.

Next, the fluctuation start processing (S1207) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S1207). This fluctuation start processing (S1207) is executed in the fluctuation processing (see FIG. 23) of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22), and is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. , "Big hit" or "missing" lottery (win / fail determination), and determine the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, a lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit is performed based on the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c (S1301). Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the gaming state at that time. As described above, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state, "7,307,582" associated with the "low probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a becomes the jackpot random number value, and the pachinko machine When the gaming state of 10 is a high probability state, "28,58,85,122,144,178,213,238,276,298," which is associated with the "high probability state" in the jackpot random number table 202a, "322,354,390,420,448,486,506,534,567,596,618,656,681,716,750,772,809,863,866,892" is the jackpot random number value. In the process of S1301, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c is compared with these jackpot random number values, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. Determine.

Then, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit as a result of the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), the jackpot time is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area 203c. The display mode is set (S1302). In this process, the jackpot type set by the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202c, that is, the 15R probability variation jackpot that shifts to the high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds is 2. The display mode of the first symbol display device 37 based on whether it is a 2R probability variation jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a round jackpot or a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. The lighting state of the LED 37a) is set. Further, based on the transition state after the jackpot, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is stopped in order to stop and display the jackpot symbols corresponding to various jackpots on the third symbol display device 81. Is set as.

Next, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) at the time of big hit is determined (S1303). The determination of the fluctuation pattern is performed based on the jackpot type set in the process of S1302, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202c. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1303, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

If it is determined in the process of S1301 that it is not a big hit (S1301: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S1304). In the process of S1304, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, it is set whether the reach is out of front / back, the reach is out of front / back, or the reach is completely out. In the present embodiment, as described above, the table is set so that the range of values corresponding to each stop pattern of the stop pattern selection counter C3 differs depending on whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. There is.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S1305). The determination of this fluctuation pattern is determined by the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a high probability state, during a time reduction, or in a low probability state excluding the time reduction), the stop type set in the processing of S1302, and the fluctuation type counter CS1. This is performed based on the value of and the deviation pattern table 202d. When the variation pattern is set in the process of S1305, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set.

When the process of S1303 or the process of S1305 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern type determined by the process of S1303 or S1305 is set (S1306). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S1302 or S1304 is set (S1307). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). To.

Next, the start winning process (S1105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S1105). This start winning process (S1105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64, and if there is a starting winning. , Executes the hold processing of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S1401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64 (S1401: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (the number of hold balls N of the variable effect held in the main control device 110) is changed. It is determined whether or not it is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S1402). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S1401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the number of pending balls N <4 (S1402: No). , Return to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first entry port 64 (S1401: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S1402: Yes), the value of the reserved ball counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is set. 1 is added (S1403), and each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 updated in step S1103 is added to the free hold area of the hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S1404).

Next, a hold ball number command including the value of the hold ball number N updated by the process of S1403 is created (S1405), the created hold ball number command is set (S1406), and the start winning process is completed. Return to timer interrupt processing. This reserved ball number command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (FIG. 28). The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls in the voice lamp control device 113 based on the number of reserved balls N included in the reserved ball number command.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S1501) as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout launch control device 311, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S1602). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process shifts to S1611. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if it is not stored (S1605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the process is shifted to S1611 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is shifted to S1611. As will be described later in the process of S1712 in FIG. 28, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S1611, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S1611). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613) is executed. Further, the initialization process (S1612, S1613) of the RAM 203 is similarly executed when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S1612, S1613), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1612), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1613). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S1605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S1607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S1608). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of shutting off the drive power is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S1610, interrupts are permitted (S1610). Then, the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1701 to S1705 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1708 and S1709 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 234 is input to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side. ) Is executed (S1701). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S1101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 25) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the counter buffer 202b of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then the specific winning opening (large opening) of the variable winning device 65 in the case of a big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the mouth) 65a is executed (S1704). That is, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, the display control process of the second symbol (for example, the symbol of "○" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1705). Briefly, on condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 267, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the second symbol is carried out at. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory attached to the first entry port 64 is opened for a predetermined time.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1707: Yes), the process is shifted to S1701, and each process after S1701 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous main process (S1707: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1708, S1709).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1708). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the counter buffer 203b of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1709).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1705 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1706, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1706: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 26 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1710 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1710), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1711). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1712), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1713), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1706 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1701 to S1705, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1708 and S1709 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1701. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1701 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S1601) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1701 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 33. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1919 (see FIG. 30) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 30, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110 (see S1916 in FIG. 30), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1919. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1919 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1802: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1919. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", data corruption in RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1803: Yes), the process proceeds to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1803: No), the process proceeds to S1808.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S1803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1804. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1919 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1803: No), and the data shifts to S1808.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1802: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1919, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1804, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1804). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1805: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S1808, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1919 is executed (see S1918 in FIG. 30). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1919 is executed, the process of S1808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1919 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1811) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1808 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely cut off, so that the process of S1808 is performed via the processes of S1804 to S1806. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1808: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1809, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1810), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1809 is that when the processing of S1808 is reached via the processing of S1804 to S1806, the processing of S1804 has already cleared all the storage areas of the RAM 223. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1901 was executed (S1901), and if 1 msec or more has not elapsed (S1901: No), S1902. -The process proceeds to S1914 without performing the process of S1912. When the processing of S1901 is performed for the first time, the process proceeds to the processing of S1902.

In the process of S1901, it is the process of S1902 to S1913 related to the display and sound settings (that is, the setting of the effect) that determines whether or not 1 msec has elapsed, and it is necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the fluctuation setting process of S1914 and the command determination process of S1915 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1915 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1914 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1901 (S1901: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1903 to S1915 are transmitted to the display control device 114. Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1910 described later (S1903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1904). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1905 without being notified by the power on notification process.

In the process of S1905, the customer waiting effect is executed, and then the pending quantity display update process is executed (S1906). In the customer waiting effect, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is a display control device as a command. It is transmitted to 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp 285 according to the value of the hold ball number counter 223a is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring process is executed (S1907). In this frame button input monitoring process, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed is performed. It is a process to be set to be performed. Details of this frame button input monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

When the frame button input monitoring process is completed, the vibration sensor input monitoring process is performed (S1908). This vibration sensor input monitoring process is a process of monitoring the input signal from the vibration sensor 228 and detecting whether or not vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the details of the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

In the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908), first, the output value (vibration level) of the vibration sensor 228 is read from the vibration sensor 228 (S1951), and it is determined from the read output value whether or not the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level. (S1952). As a result, if the vibration level is less than the predetermined level (S1952: No), the vibration sensor input monitoring process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30).

On the other hand, if the vibration level is equal to or higher than a predetermined level (S1952: Yes), it is determined that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and an alarm sound is set to be output from the voice output device 226 (S1953) and displayed. An error command for notifying the occurrence of the vibration error is set for the control device 114 (S1954), and the process returns to the main process (FIG. 30). As a result, the display control device 31 performs a process of displaying an error message image for notifying the vibration error on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 30, the description of the main process will be continued. When the vibration sensor input monitoring process (S1908) is completed, the advance notice effect process is then executed (S1909). This advance notice effect processing is a process for executing the advance notice effect during the variation effect when the variation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is performed. Details of the advance notice effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

When the advance notice effect processing (S1909) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1910), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1911). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting. If the alarm sound output is set by the vibration sensor input monitoring process (see FIG. 31) (see S1953), the alarm sound output pattern is set by this sound editing / output processing, and the alarm sound is voiced. It is output from the output device 226.

After the process of S1911, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1912), and then the counter update process is performed (S1913), and the process proceeds to the process of S1914. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1910 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1911 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the counter update process, various counters provided in the RAM 223 are updated. For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are updated in this counter update process. The detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is updated by adding 1 in order within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (99), and then returning to 0. Further, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (0 to 99 in the present embodiment), reaching the maximum value (99), and then returning to 0.

In the process of S1914, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Executes the variable setting process, which is the process set for transmission. The details of this fluctuation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 33. Then, after the fluctuation setting process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1915). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

When the processing of S1915 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1916). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S1918), and the power-off process is executed (S1919). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1920), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1917), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1917: No), the process returns to the process of S1901 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1917: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1915). This command determination process (S1915) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. ..

In the command determination process, first, the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been performed (S2001). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation pattern type (any of fluctuations A to E and 2R fluctuations) is extracted from the fluctuation pattern command (S2002), and the process returns to the main process. .. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a detailed variation pattern is determined based on the stored variation pattern type in the variation setting process (see FIG. 33) described later. Then, the detailed variation pattern determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the display variation pattern command, and the variation effect is produced by the third symbol display device 81 according to the notified detailed variation pattern. Will be done.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S2001: No), it is then determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2003). Then, when it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S2003: Yes), the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2004), and the stop type indicated by the stop type command is extracted and the RAM 233 is further extracted. (S2005) and return to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2003: No), it is then determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2006). Then, when it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2006: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, the hold ball count command is held by the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect) is extracted and stored in the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2007).

Here, since the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64 (starting prize), the process of S2007 is performed every time there is a starting winning. , The value of the reserved ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the hold ball number counter 223a of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize The value of the reserved ball counter 223a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball counter 203a of the main controller 110.

Further, after the processing of S2007, a display holding ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the holding ball number counter 223a updated by the processing of S2007 is set (S2008), and the process returns to the main processing. .. As a result, the display control device 114 executes the process so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbol according to the reserved ball number.

If it is determined that the reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S2006 (S2006: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2010), the process shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command and the confirmation command received from the main control device 110 are set as the display demo command and the display confirmation command by the process of S2010, and are transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A detailed variation pattern is determined based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated. , To generate a display stop type command that notifies the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command, and to send the generated display variation pattern command and display stop type command to the display control unit 114. This is the process to set to. Further, the value of the reserved ball number counter 223a is updated along with the display of the variation effect, and the display reserved ball number command is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the updated reserved ball number. Further, when the determined detailed fluctuation pattern is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the advance notice effect, the process related to the control of the advance notice effect is also performed.

In the fluctuation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2101). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S2101: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation setting process is performed. Exit and return to the main process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S2101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S2102), and then extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the processing of S2002 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 32). The variation pattern type (any of the variation A to E, 2R variation) in the variation effect and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the processing of S2005 are acquired from the RAM 223 (S2103).

Then, the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b is read out, and the detailed fluctuation pattern is based on the value of the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b, the fluctuation pattern type and the stop type acquired from the processing of S2103, and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a. Is determined (S2104).

Only the fluctuation time is specified as the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, but according to this S2104, one of various detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time is specified. One variation pattern is selected, and the selected variation pattern is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed.

For example, when the fluctuation pattern type notified by the fluctuation pattern command is fluctuation A (variation time 30 seconds), one fluctuation pattern is selected from the detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the fluctuation time 30 seconds. To. The normal reach A is a detailed variation pattern selected when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation A (variation time 30 seconds). If the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation B (variation time 60 seconds), one variation pattern is selected from the detailed variation patterns prepared for the variation time 60 seconds. To. Super reach A is a detailed variation pattern selected when the variation pattern type notified by the variation pattern command is variation B (variation time 60 seconds).

When a detailed fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of S2104, a display fluctuation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed fluctuation pattern to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Set to send to (S2105).

Further, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type acquired by the process of S2103 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2106).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 displays the variation of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Start the display control of the fluctuation effect. Further, when the display control device 114 receives the display stop type command, selects a stop symbol suitable for the stop type, and confirms and displays the variation effect started by the display variation pattern command. Display the selected stop symbol.

Next, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is decremented by 1 as the hold ball is consumed (that is, the change display corresponding to the hold ball is set) in accordance with the setting of the display fluctuation pattern command. (S2107), a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the hold ball number indicated by the value of the updated hold ball number counter 223a is set (S2108). The display control device 114 executes a process of displaying the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, it is determined whether or not the detailed fluctuation pattern determined in S2104 is normal reach A or super reach A that performs the advance notice effect (S2109), and if it is normal reach A or super reach A that performs the advance notice effect. (S2109: Yes), the notice effect flag 223c is set to on (S2110). As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled so as to perform the advance notice effect during the variation effect.

Then, the judgment upper limit pointer 223g that determines the pattern of the advance notice effect based on whether the stop type of the variation effect set this time is off or a big hit and the variation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A becomes a big hit. It is set for each rank of the expected value (S2111), and the pattern of the advance notice production is based on whether the stop type of the fluctuation production set this time is out of order or a big hit, and whether the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A. The maximum rank of the expected value that is a big hit that can be determined as is set (S2112).

Specifically, when the stop type is a jackpot, regardless of the fluctuation pattern, as the processing of S2111, "9" is set as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot indicates rank "5". Given, "49" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "4", and the judgment upper limit value pointer is given to the pattern whose expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "3". "69" is given as 223d, and "49" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern in which the expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "4", and the expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "1". On the other hand, "99" is given as the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d. Further, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is a big hit that can be determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect is set to "5".

Further, when the stop type is out of the range and the fluctuation pattern is Super Reach A, as the processing of S2111, "19" is set as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d for the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot indicates the rank "4". Given, "29" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "3", and the judgment upper limit value pointer is given to the pattern whose expectation degree of jackpot indicates rank "2". "49" is given as 223d, and "99" is given as a judgment upper limit pointer 223d for a pattern in which the expectation degree of a big hit indicates rank "1". Further, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is a big hit that can be determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect is set to "4".

Further, when the stop type is out of order and the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A, "1" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern whose expectation degree of big hit indicates rank "3" as the processing of S2111. , "9" is given as the judgment upper limit pointer 223d to the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot indicates the rank "2", and the judgment upper limit value pointer 223d is given to the pattern in which the expectation degree of the jackpot indicates the rank "1". As "99" is given. Further, as the process of S2112, the maximum rank of the expected value that is a big hit that can be determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect is set to "3".

Then, the second pointer 223f is set to the initial value "99" (S2113), and the variation setting process is terminated. Based on the settings of S211 to S2113, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined.

Next, the frame button input monitoring process (S1907) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this frame button input monitoring process (S1907). This frame button input monitoring process (S1907) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the player instructs the operation of the frame button 22. Is monitored and accepted.

In this frame button input monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation effect is being executed (S2121), and if the variation effect is being executed (S2121: Yes), then the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, or It is determined whether or not the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the notice effect by the cut-in 155 is in progress (S2122). Then, if the frame button operation acceptance period is in progress (S2122: Yes), the frame button operation flag 223g is set to ON (S2123), and the frame button input monitoring process ends. As a result, in each advance notice effect, a pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, and the advance notice effect is executed based on the determined pattern.

On the other hand, in the process of S2122, if the frame button operation acceptance period is not in progress (S2122: No), the frame button input monitoring process is terminated as it is. As a result, even if the frame button operation 22 is operated during the variable effect execution and not during the frame button operation acceptance period, the operation is invalidated.

If it is determined by the process of S2121 that the variation effect is not being executed (S2121: No), the process according to the game state is executed (S2124), and the frame button input monitoring process is terminated. In the process of S2124, for example, a process of changing the stage is performed, and a rear image change command for the display control device 114 is set. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image according to the stage. The process of changing to is performed. In addition, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation display, pressing the frame button 22 displays the expected value of the jackpot due to this fluctuation, or pressing the frame button 22 during the reach production gives a feeling of expectation for the jackpot. The effect may be changed to a possessable effect, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one reach effect from a plurality of reach effects.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the advance notice effect processing (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect processing (S1909). This advance notice effect processing (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the variation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is performed. If so, it is a process for executing the advance notice effect during the variable effect.

In this advance notice effect processing, first, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect flag 223c is on (S2131). If the advance notice effect flag 223c is off instead of on (S2131: No), it means that the variable effect that does not include the advance notice effect is selected, so that the present advance notice effect process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the notice effect flag 223c is on (S2131: Yes), then, currently, during the frame button operation acceptance period provided for each notice effect of comment display 151, super reach selection 153, and cut-in 155. It is determined whether or not there is (S2132). Then, when the frame button operation acceptance period is in progress (S2132: Yes), it is determined whether or not the frame button operation flag 223g is on (S2133), and when the frame button operation flag 222g is off instead of on (S2133). S2133: No), the advance notice production process ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the frame button operation flag 223g is on (S2133: Yes), it means that the player has accepted the operation instruction of the frame button 22, so the frame button operation flag 223g is set to off (S2134). After that, the advance notice effect rank determination process for determining the pattern of the advance notice effect is executed (S2135), and further, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect rank determination process and the pattern of the advance notice effect are determined. A notice effect command including information indicating the type of the notice effect (comment display 151, super reach selection 153, cut-in 155) is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. The advance notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30). The details of the advance notice effect rank determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

As a result, in each of the advance notice effects of the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155, when the player gives an operation instruction of the frame button 22, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, and the operation instruction is also used. Accordingly, the image of the advance notice effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device.

Specifically, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151, the image prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is deleted, and the image shown in FIG. It is displayed on 81. At this time, the color of the frame 163 (see FIG. 9A) of the balloon 162 is displayed according to the pattern determined by the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135).

In addition, in the super reach selection 153, the character information in the balloon of the boy 166 that prompts the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is "Determine the destroyer !! Press the button!"). Instead, the character information "Who is the destroyer?" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which gives the player the expectation that the destroyer selected by the operation of the frame button 22 is.

As described above, in the advance notice effect itself by the super reach selection 153, the determined pattern (rank of the expected value that becomes a big hit) is not notified to the player, and in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 to be performed next. The player will be notified of the pattern (rank of the expected value that will be a big hit) determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. In the present embodiment, when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the advance notice effect command is displayed including the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect rank determination process, as in the case of other advance notice effects. Although it is transmitted to the control device 114, for the above reason, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, when the advance notice effect pattern is determined, the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined by the advance notice effect rank determination process is determined. A notice effect command that merely notifies that the pattern of the notice effect has been determined may be transmitted to the display control device 114 without including the information to be shown. In the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the display control device 114 receives the notice effect command notifying that the pattern of the notice effect has been determined, so that the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is displayed. Instead of the text information in the balloon of the boy 166 that prompts the operation, "I will decide the destroyer !! Press the button!"), The player expects who is the destroyer selected by operating the frame button 22. The character information "Who is the destroyer?" Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the image prompting the operation of the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is temporarily deleted, and the cut-in image shown in FIG. 12 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Display for seconds. At this time, the color of the cut-in frame 174 (see FIG. 12) is displayed according to the pattern determined by the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135).

In the process of S2132, if it is determined that the comment display 151, the super reach selection 153, and the cut-in 155 are not in the frame button operation acceptance period provided in each notice effect (S2132: No), then At present, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 or the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137). As a result, if it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, or the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: Yes), the process of S2135 is performed. After executing the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) that determines the pattern of the advance notice effect, the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect rank determination process and the pattern of the advance notice effect are displayed. A notice effect command including information indicating the determined type of notice effect (either child character appearance 152 or super reach selection 153) is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. As described above, the advance notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30).

As a result, in the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined when the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached, and the image of the advance notice effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 9B. Can be displayed on the third symbol display device. The color of the clothes 164a (see FIG. 9B) of the child 164 is displayed according to the pattern determined by the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135).

Further, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, if the player does not instruct the operation of the frame button 22 during the frame button operation acceptance period, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined at the end of the frame button operation acceptance period. Also, at that time, instead of the text information in the balloon of the boy 166 that prompts the operation of the displayed frame button, "I will decide the destroyer !! Press the button!"), By operating the frame button 22 The character information "Who is the destroyer?" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to give the player a feeling of expectation as to who the selected destroyer is.

In this case as well, in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the pattern of the advance notice effect is simply determined without including the information indicating the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect rank determination process. A notice effect command that only notifies may be transmitted to the display control device 114. In the notice effect by the super reach selection 153, the display control device 114 receives the notice effect command notifying that the pattern of the notice effect has been determined, so that the frame button displayed during the frame button operation acceptance period is displayed. Instead of the text information in the balloon of the boy 166 that prompts the operation, "I will decide the destroyer !! Press the button!"), The player expects who is the destroyer selected by operating the frame button 22. The character information "Who is the destroyer?" Can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S2137, when it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152 and the end timing of the frame button operation acceptance period provided in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (S2137: No), then, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138). As a result, when it is determined that it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, the process proceeds to S2136, and the expected value indicated by the advance notice effect pattern determined in the advance notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153. A notice effect command including information indicating the rank of the above and information indicating the character appearance 154 as the type of the notice effect is set (S2136), and the notice effect process ends. Since the determination rank counter 223e is held until the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined next by the advance notice effect rank determination process, the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e at the time when the process of S2136 is performed is determined. It is the rank of the expected value indicated by the pattern of the advance notice effect determined in the advance notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153. As described above, the advance notice effect command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process of S1902 of the main process (FIG. 30).

As a result, in the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154, when the execution timing of the advance notice effect is reached, the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit indicated by the pattern determined by the advance notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153. By the patterns of the same rank, the image of the advance notice effect, specifically, the image shown in FIG. 11 can be displayed on the third symbol display device. At this time, the type of the character and the color attached to the character are displayed according to the pattern determined by the advance notice effect by the previous super reach selection 153.

On the other hand, in the process of S2138, if it is determined that it is not the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138: No), the advance notice effect process is terminated as it is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this notice effect rank determination process (S2135). This advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the advance notice effect process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the process of executing the advance notice effect pattern. Is.

In this notice effect rank determination process, first, the determination rank counter 223e is set to the maximum rank of the determination rank set in the process of S2112 of the variation setting process (FIG. 33) (S2140). That is, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is a "big hit", the maximum rank "5" of the determination rank is set. When the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A", the maximum rank "4" of the determination rank is set. When the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", the maximum rank "3" of the determination rank is set.

As a result, in the subsequent processing, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "big hit", the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect are obtained from the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" of the expectation degree that becomes the big hit. If the result of the fluctuation effect that is compared with the counter 223d and the advance notice effect is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A", the rank of the expectation that becomes a big hit " From the pattern corresponding to "4", the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d can be compared, the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect is performed is "off", and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach". In the case of "A", the determination upper limit value pointer 222b and the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared from the pattern corresponding to the rank "3" of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit. Therefore, when the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "off", at least the pattern corresponding to the rank "5" is not selected, and the result of the variable effect in which the notice effect is performed is "off". , When the variation pattern of the notice effect is "normal reach A", the pattern corresponding to the rank "4" can also be prevented from being selected.

Next, from the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b set in the process of S2111 of the fluctuation setting process (FIG. 33), the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank of the expected degree of jackpot indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e. Is extracted, the value U is compared with the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d (S2141), and it is determined whether or not the value A is equal to or less than the value U (S2142).

As a result, when the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), the rank of the pattern for performing the advance notice effect is determined. The rank indicated by the counter 223e is determined (S2143). The rank determined here is notified to the display control device 114 by the advance notice effect command, and the display control device 114 displays the image of the advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81 in a pattern corresponding to this rank. The player can recognize the rank of the degree of expectation that is a big hit by looking at the pattern displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

After that, the value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b determined by the process of S2143 is set in the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the advance notice effect rank determination process is terminated.

Further, when the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e by the processing of S2142 (S2142: No), then the judgment rank counter 223e The value U of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by (S2145) is compared with the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2145), and it is determined whether or not the value U is equal to the value S (S2146). As a result, when the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is not equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2147), the value of the judgment rank counter 223e is subtracted by 1 (1). S2147), the process returns to the process of S2141. As a result, next, the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared with respect to the rank of the expectation degree that is the jackpot that is one rank lower, and the rank is given the advance notice effect. Judge whether or not to rank.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2146, when the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), it is indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e. It means that the pattern of the same rank as the one to be used is determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to the process of S2143 described above, and the rank of the pattern for performing the advance notice effect is determined to be the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143). Then, the value of the rank determination upper limit value pointer 222b determined by the process of S2143 is set in the second pointer 223f (S2144), and the advance notice effect rank determination process is terminated.

As a result, when the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the next notice production (subsequent notice production), when determining the pattern of the notice production, one of them. It is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation of being a big hit than the rank of.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expectation degree of becoming a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain advance notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is shown. In (subsequent advance notice production), when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree that is a big hit than the one rank. Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of the jackpot, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a certain cut-in image. When is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, every time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when a new pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, a certain rank is determined by determining the rank pattern indicated by the value of the judgment rank counter 223e as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Even if the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is not changed so that the pattern of the rank lower than that rank is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect each time the pattern of The value can be used to deselect a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for each type of non-selected rank, the storage capacity required for storing the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 51, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (a). FIG. 37A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 315 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2201), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start. Here, the boot process (S2201) will be described with reference to FIG. 37 (b). FIG. 37B is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2201) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 have a dedicated program ROM (for example, ROM 22 described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-223598) as in a conventional game machine. Instead of being provided and stored, it is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is released is performed. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2211). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2212). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S2212, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2212, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2213). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are transferred to the program storage area 233a, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) described above are transferred to the data table storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2214), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2201 in FIG. 37) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 37 (a)) (S2215), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2201) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 81. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a2, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 37 (b), the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2211 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2211 executes the boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2212. It may be part of a boot program. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further instructs the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process set in the pointer 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2211 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this transfer. The process of setting the start address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2211. And, after repeating the process of S2212 a plurality of times, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released has been described. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes of S2213 to S2215 may be executed without performing the processes of S2211 and S2212. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 37 (a). When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2202). Specifically, the MPU 231 is initially set, and processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2203). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2203, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2204). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2204, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2205). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 49 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 434 to transfer the image is executed (see S3002 in FIG. 49 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 434 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command is drawn so that the power-on image (main image at power-on and variable image at power-on) shown in FIG. 15 is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38 (b)). The determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 38 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 38 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (c) is immediately displayed during the variation effect period. A simple variable effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2205, interrupt permission is set (S2206), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2206, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 38A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 38 (b). FIG. 38B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 21) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 38 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed. Therefore, it is not the image at power-on shown in FIG. The command determination process (S2402) is executed in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, and then the display setting process (S2403) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d and corresponds to the set display data table. The transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. When the advance notice effect command is stored, the additional data table for the advance notice effect according to the type and pattern of the advance notice effect is set in the additional data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode of the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained as the third symbol. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43.

In the display setting process (S2403), the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e by the command determination process (S2402) or the like. Next, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specifically specified. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object), various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233b is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the rear image after the change is sent to the image controller 237. Set a transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the above from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), which are determined in the task process (S2404), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front / rear deviation reach, reach other than front / rear deviation) The stop type table corresponding to (completely off) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2401 that the simple image display flag is on (S2401: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. , The simple command determination process (S2408) is executed in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 on the third symbol display device 81, and then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed to process S2404. Move to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2402), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 39, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command For all the unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2503).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display reserved ball number command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display reserved ball number command (S2504: Yes), the hold ball number command process is performed. Is executed (S2505), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the reserved ball number command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). FIG. 40A is a flowchart showing the reserved ball number command processing. This hold ball number command process executes the process corresponding to the display hold ball number command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the hold ball count command processing, first, the new hold ball count command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2403) that the display hold ball count command has been processed in the on state is turned on (S2601), and then the display hold ball count command is turned on (S2601). Acquire the reserved ball number information included in the ball number command (S2602). In the process of S2602, if two or more display hold ball count commands are stored in the command buffer area, the hold ball count information is acquired from the display hold ball count command stored last. As a result, the latest information on the number of reserved balls can be obtained.

Then, among the number determination flags provided for each number of reserved balls, the number determination flag corresponding to the number of reserved balls acquired in the process of S2602 is turned on, and the number determination flags corresponding to the other number of reserved balls are turned off. (S2603), the process returns to the command determination process.

As a result, in the display setting process, when the new reserved ball count command flag is on, by referring to the number determination flag, the number of reserved balls symbol corresponding to the number determination flag for which the on is set is set. Is developed so that the reserved image data is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no display reserved ball count command in the processing of S2504 (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display confirmation command among the unprocessed commands. If there is a confirmation command for display (S2506: Yes), the confirmation command process is executed (S2507), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the confirmation command processing (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (b). FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the confirmation command processing. This confirmation command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the confirmation command processing (S2507), the confirmation command flag for notifying the display setting processing (S2403) that the display confirmation command has been received in the ON state is set to ON (S2611), this processing is terminated, and the command is determined. Return to processing. As a result, in the display setting process, the state of the confirmation command flag is monitored, and when the flag is turned on, the display setting process is started so that the display of the confirmation display effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. To execute. Further, when the display setting of the variable effect is processed and the confirmation command flag is not turned on even after the effect time set for the variable effect has elapsed, the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display setting process is executed so as to be performed.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no display confirmation command in the processing of S2506 (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display demo command among the unprocessed commands (S2506: No). If there is a display demo command (S2508: Yes), the demo command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the demo command processing (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (c). FIG. 40 (c) is a flowchart showing demo command processing. This demo command process executes the process corresponding to the display demo command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the demo command processing (S2509), first, the demo display data table corresponding to the demo effect is selected from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2621). Next, it is necessary to clear the contents by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233e, and in the demo display data table, it is necessary to newly transfer the image data necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Since the drawing of the image is specified so that the image is not drawn, the corresponding transfer data table is not prepared in the data table storage area 233b. Therefore, the Full data is also written to the transfer data table buffer 233f to clear the contents (S2622). ).

Next, the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2623), and the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2624). Then, the demo display flag indicating that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set to on, and the final display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the on state. The confirmation display flag shown is set to off, and the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state is set to off (S2625), the demo command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this demo command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S2624, from the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2621. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Further, in the display setting process, the time of the demo effect specified in the demo display data table is measured by using the time counter 233i in which the time data corresponding to the demo effect is set by the process of S2623, and the process of S2625 is performed. Based on the state of the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag set by, when it is determined by the time measurement of the display setting control metering counter 233i that the demo effect in the demo display data table has been completed, the next effect to be displayed. As a result, control is performed so that the demo effect is displayed again.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no display demo command in the processing of S2508 (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands. (S2510) If there is a display variation pattern command (S2510: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a). FIG. 41A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and displayed. Set to the data table buffer 233d (S2631).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2631, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time Set the table in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control. When instructed by the device 110, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is given from the main control device 110 while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the variation effect according to the set variation display data table. ) Is received, and the changing third symbol is suddenly stopped and displayed, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table for fluctuation corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time in the display data table buffer 233d, it is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having the fluctuation time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the confirmation command from the main control device 110 Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the restart effect is displayed until the (display confirmation command) is received, the player changes the restart effect. It can be visually recognized as a part of the effect, and the fluctuation of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 can be continuously observed until the stop display of the third symbol is confirmed.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2631 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233f (S2632). Then, the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the additional data table buffer 233e (S2633).

After that, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S2631 is turned on, and other The data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table of is set to off (S2634). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S2634, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Can be judged. Then, in the display setting process, it is determined whether or not there is a contradiction between the fluctuation pattern of the set fluctuation display data table and the stop symbol set by the display stop type command received later, and if there is a contradiction. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d to set the display data table corresponding to the special variation as described later.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233i (S2635). Initialize the pointer 233g to 0 (S2636). Then, the confirmation command flag, the demo display flag, and the confirmation display flag are all set to off (S2637), and the restart timer counter used in the display setting process is initialized to 0 (S2638). And return to the command judgment process.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233g initialized by the processing of S2636 is updated, and the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2631 is executed. Extracts the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer is processed by S2632. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g is extracted from the transfer data table set in 233f, and the sprite image data required in the set variation display data table is used in advance from the character ROM 234 for normal use. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the data is transferred to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233i in which the variation time data is set by the process of S2635, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is measured. If it is determined that the confirmation command (display confirmation command) from the main control device 110 is received, the confirmation display effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the confirmation is made within a predetermined time after the variation effect is completed. If the command (confirmation command for display) cannot be received, the display setting is controlled so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, if both the display confirmation command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display confirmation command is prioritized, the display is used. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is no longer performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display confirmation command is determined first, so that the confirmation command processing, which is the process corresponding to the display confirmation command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the confirmation command flag set by the confirmation command for display can be set to off by overwriting as in the process of S2637. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display confirmation command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Similarly, if both the display demo command and the display variation pattern command are stored in the command buffer area as unprocessed commands, if the processing corresponding to the display demo command is prioritized, it is for display. Since the variation effect associated with the variation pattern command is no longer performed, it is necessary to prioritize the processing corresponding to the variation pattern command for display. On the other hand, in this command judgment process, the presence or absence of the display demo command is determined first, so that the demo command process, which is the process corresponding to the display demo command, is always executed first, while the display is displayed. The process corresponding to the variable pattern command for use is executed later, and the demo display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the display demo command is rewritten to the variable display data table by overwriting as in the process of S2631. Can be done. Therefore, the processing of the display variation pattern command can be prioritized over the display demo command, and the variation effect accompanying the display variation pattern command can be prioritized and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command in the processing of S2510 (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands. Then (S2512), if there is a display variable type command (S2511: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (b). FIG. 41B is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the variable type command processing, first, the stop corresponding to the stop type information (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, time saving jackpot, front-rear reach, non-front-rear reach, or complete loss) indicated by the display stop type command. The type table is determined (S2641), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the display device 81 is finally set (S2642).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to off (S2643).

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, the type information that specifies the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is described as. In the above-mentioned task process (S2404), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2642 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2643, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

After the processing of S2643, the comparison flag is then turned on (S2644) to end this stop type command processing, and the process returns to the command determination processing. By turning on this comparison flag, in the display setting process, whether or not there is a contradiction between the variation pattern of the variation display table set by the above variation pattern command setting process and the stop symbol set by the process of S2642. If there is a contradiction, the display data table corresponding to the special variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d as described later.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2641, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S2642.

If the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is set, the stop symbol of the jackpot will be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is actually off, and the player This may lead to misunderstanding that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has become a big hit, and may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a big hit, the completely disengaged stop symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. However, since the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot state, the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no display stop type command in the processing of S2512 (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a warning effect command among the unprocessed commands (S2512: No). S2514) If there is a notice effect command (S2514: Yes), the advance notice effect command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the advance notice effect command processing (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (a). FIG. 42A is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect command processing. This advance notice effect command process executes the process corresponding to the advance notice effect command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the advance notice effect command processing, the type of advance notice effect indicated by the information included in the advance notice effect command (comment display 151, child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, cut-in 155), and An additional data table for the advance notice effect corresponding to the pattern for executing the advance notice effect (a pattern indicating the rank of the expected value to be a big hit set by the voice lamp control device 113) is determined, and the determined additional for the advance notice effect is added. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the additional data table buffer 233e (S2651). Then, the advance notice effect command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

As a result, in the display setting process, the variation effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the additional data table for advance notice effect stored in the additional data table buffer 233e by the process of S2651. The display content of the next one frame of the image on the third symbol display device 81 is specified so that the rehearsal effect is additionally displayed. As a result, the advance notice effect of the advance notice effect type specified by the rehearsal effect command is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the specified pattern, so that the pattern of the advance notice effect is expected to be a big hit for the player. Can indicate the rank of the degree. The image data used in the display of the advance notice effect is set in advance by the processing of S2632 of the variation pattern command process when the super reach A or the normal reach A in which the advance notice effect is performed is specified by the display variation pattern command. The transfer data table corresponding to the super reach A or the normal reach A is transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no advance notice effect command in the processing of S2514 (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2516). ), If there is a back image change command (S2516: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 42 (b). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the rear image change command process, first, the rear image change flag for notifying the transfer setting process (S2405) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on (S2661). Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type (back A to C), the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and other back images are displayed. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S2662), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S2661 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S2662. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by S2662 is used. The type of back image to be displayed at the time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type (resident) in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. Video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S2662, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Returning to FIG. 39, when it is determined that there is no rear image change command in the processing of S2516 (S2516: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2520). If there is an error command (S2520: Yes), the error command processing is executed (S2521), and the process returns to the processing of S2501.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2521) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S2681). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S2682). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S2681, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S2682 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2682 sets the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Returning to FIG. 39, if it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2520 (S2520: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2522), and the process returns to the process of S2501.

In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), The processing of S2502 to S2522 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2522 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S2408) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38 (b)) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, the commands required to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 15 from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, the display table confirmation command and the display variation pattern. Only the command and the stop type command for display are extracted, and the processing corresponding to each command is the confirmation command processing (see FIG. 40 (b)), the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 41 (a)), and the stop type. A command process (see FIG. 41 (c)) is executed, and other commands are discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 41A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2631. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable dynamic image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2632, the process of writing the Bull data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing the contents is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2403), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIGS. 44 and 45 are flowcharts showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S2701), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2701: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S2702 to S2710 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2711. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S2701: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S2702), S2703 to S2710. Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S2703, it is determined whether or not the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2703), and if the new reserved ball count command flag is on (S2703: Yes), it is for display in the previous command determination process. It is determined that the hold ball number command has been processed, and the hold image setting process is executed (S2704).

Here, the details of the hold image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a). FIG. 46A is a flowchart showing the hold image setting process. In this reserved image setting process, the number of reserved balls symbols notified from the voice lamp control device 113 are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the processing of the reserved ball number command for display. This is a process for developing image data.

In the hold image setting process, first, the number determination flag is referred to, and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number determination flag set to be turned on is displayed in the hold display area Ds (FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81. The reserved image data to be displayed in (see) is expanded (S2751). In the task processing, based on the expanded reserved image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the reserved image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

In the hold image setting process, after the process of S2751, the new hold ball number command is set to off (S2752), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 44, after the hold image setting process (S3104) or in the process of S2703, when it is determined that the new hold ball number command flag is not on, that is, is off (S2703: No), then , It is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S2705). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S2705: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S2706).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (b). FIG. 46B is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S2761).

In the task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the warning image are specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various parameters required.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S2761, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S2762), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Returning to FIG. 44, after the warning image setting process (S2706) or in the process of S2705, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S2705: No), then the comparison flag Determines whether or not is on (S2709). Then, if the comparison flag is on (S2709: Yes), the comparison process is executed (S2710).

Here, the details of the comparison process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the comparison process. This process changes when the change display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the display change pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent. In order to change the effect to a special variable effect that displays the third symbol in a high-speed variable manner until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. It is a process of.

In the comparison process, first, among the data table discrimination flags, the data table discrimination flag set to the ON state is specified, and from the specified data table discrimination flag, the variation stored in the display data table buffer 233b. The type of the display data table is specified (S2781). Next, among the stop symbol determination flags, the stop symbol determination flag set in the ON state is specified, and the set stop symbol is specified from the specified stop symbol determination flag (S2782).

Then, it is determined whether or not the type of the variable display data table specified by the process of S2781 matches the stop symbol specified by the process of S2782 (S2783). As described above, the display data table for fluctuations is prepared for each fluctuation pattern, and for each fluctuation pattern, there is a deviation, a 15R fixed jackpot / time saving jackpot shared, a 15R probability variable jackpot, and a 2R probability variable jackpot. ··and so on. Therefore, in the processing of S2783, for example, even though the fluctuation display data table corresponds to the fluctuation pattern for deviation, if the stop symbol is set as the jackpot symbol, it is determined that these do not match. ..

In the process of S2783, if it is determined to match (S2783: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S2788, the comparison flag is set to off (S2788), and then the process returns to the display setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no match (S2783: No), first, the display data table for special variation in which the special variation is defined is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table are set. By writing the Null data to each of the buffers 233f, their contents are cleared (S2784).

Next, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the special stop symbol (for example, the symbol displayed as "3", "4", "1" from the left column) is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned on. Is set to off (S2785), and the time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2786). As described above, the special variation effect changes the third symbol at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. Since it is to be displayed, the effect time is set to a long time (for example, 3 minutes). Therefore, in the time counter 233i, 3 minutes (180,000 milliseconds) ÷ 20 milliseconds = 9000 is set as the time data corresponding to the effect time of the special variation effect.

Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2787), the comparison flag is set to off (S2788), and the process returns to the display setting process.

In this way, if the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d based on the display variation pattern command and the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command are inconsistent, it is special. Since the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the third symbol display device 81 displays a special variation effect in which the third symbol continues to fluctuate at high speed. Then, since the special stop symbol is set as the stop symbol, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is received, the special stop symbol is set. Can be confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display 281.

Here, when the variation effect pattern instructed by the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the stop symbol to be displayed at the time of stop display of the variation effect do not match, the display control device 114 sets the main control device. There is a possibility that the result of the lottery performed in 110 cannot be correctly reflected to perform the variable effect or the final display effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, in such a case, a special variation effect is performed, and after the variation is displayed, a special stop symbol indicating a special deviation is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the main control device Even if the result of the lottery in 110 is wrong, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from accidentally performing the final display effect of the jackpot. Further, even if the special stop symbol is confirmed and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, if the lottery result in the main control device 110 is a big hit, the actual gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state. The person can continue the game with peace of mind. Further, by setting the confirmation display to a special stop symbol, it is possible to suggest to the player that the pachinko machine 10 may be in a big hit state even if the confirmation display is off. Even though the confirmation display is off, the pachinko machine 10 is in a big hit state, so that the player does not feel uneasy.

Returning to FIG. 44, after the comparison process (S2710) or in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the comparison flag is not on, that is, it is off (S2709: No), then the process proceeds to the process of S2711. To do.

In S2711, the pointer update process is executed (S2711). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process performs the corresponding drawing contents or transfer from the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the additional data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233g that specifies the address from which the transfer data information of the target image data should be acquired.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 g (S2791). That is, in principle, the pointer 233g is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the actual data of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233e, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that each of them is ordered from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233g by the processing of S2791, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233g is End information. Is determined (S2792). As a result, if it is End information (S2792: Yes), it means that the pointer 233g has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table or a restart display data table (S2793), and the demo display data table or restart display data is determined. If it is a table (S2793: Yes), the pointer 233g is set to 1 (S2794), and further, it corresponds to the effect time of the demo display data table or the restart display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The time data is set in the time counting counter 233i (S2795), and the process proceeds to S2977. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table or the restart display data table, so that the demo effect or the restart effect is repeated on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2793, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is neither the demo display data table nor the restart display data table (S2793: No), the pointer 233 g is used. The value is subtracted by 1 (S2996), and the process proceeds to S2977. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table and the restart display data table, for example, a variable display data table or a confirmed display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , Since the drawing content of the previous address in which the End information is described is always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 is made to display the last image specified in the display data table in a stopped state. be able to.

As a result of the processing of S2792, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, when it is determined that the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233g updated by the processing of S2791 is not End information, S2793 to S2795 The process of S2797 is skipped and the process proceeds to S2797.

In the processing of S2797, it is determined whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2797), and if the confirmation command flag is not on but off (S2977: No), the pointer update processing is terminated and the display is set. Return to processing. On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2797: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, so that the display data table buffer In the display data buffer set to 233d, the value of the pointer 233g is set to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the end position address where the End information is stored (S2798), and the value of the timing counter is set to 1. (S2799), the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, when the confirmation command is received, the display setting process can expand the drawing contents defined at the end of the set display data table and control the start of the confirmation display effect.

Returning to FIG. 44, after the pointer update process, the address indicated by the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process from the display data table and the additional data table set in the display data table buffer 233d and the additional data table buffer 233e. The drawn contents are expanded (S2712). In the task processing, the types of sprites (display objects) that compose the image are specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S2712 together with the previously expanded pending image and warning image, and for each sprite. , Display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing are determined. If Null data is described in the additional data table, the subsequent processing is executed assuming that there is no sprite to be added. Further, when the additional data table buffer 233e is cleared by the Null data, the Null data is always expanded from the additional data table buffer 233e.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter g is subtracted by 1 (S2713), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233i after the subtraction is 0 or less (S2714). Then, when the value of the time counter 233i is 1 or more (S2714: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233i is 0 or less (S2714: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114 in accordance with the end of the effect. ) Should be transmitted, so in the subsequent processing of S2715, it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation command flag is on (S2715).

As a result, if the confirmation command flag is on (S2715: Yes), it means that the confirmation command (confirmation command for display) has been received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 114. The display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the contents are cleared by writing Full data to the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f, respectively (S2716). Next, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmation display is set in the time counter 233i (S2717), and the value of the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2718). Then, after setting the confirmation command flag to off (S2719) and then setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the on state to on (S2720), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are used as they are in the work RAM 233. It is copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in (S2721), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the display data table for variation is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a confirmation command (confirmation for display) is sent from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 at the end of the effect. When the command) is received, the drawing content can be set so that the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 281.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2721 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table. From the start of the operation until a predetermined time elapses, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2404), from the start of the fluctuation until a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S2721 and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, if the confirmation command flag is off instead of on in the processing of S2715 (S2715: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2722 shown in FIG. 45, and it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is on (S2722). ). If the confirmation display flag is on (S2722: Yes), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the confirmation display effect is completed, so the confirmation display flag is set to off. Later (S2723), the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2724), and then the time data corresponding to the effect time of the data display is set in the time counter 233i (S2725). Then, the pointer 233g is initialized to 0 (S2726), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S2727), and the V interrupt process is terminated.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the display demo effect command indicating the start of the demo effect is not received by the end of the final display effect, the display automatically. The drawing contents can be set so that the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The branching condition of S2722: Yes is satisfied when the definite display effect is performed. In this case, the contents of the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are changed by the processing of S2716. It has been cleared. Therefore, in the process of S2724, the process of clearing those data table buffers is omitted. As a result, the processing load on the MPU 231 can be reduced.

In the process of S2722, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S2722: No), then it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S2728). If the demo display flag is on (S2728: Yes), the result of the determination in the processing of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the demo production has ended. Therefore, the display setting process is ended as it is, and V Return to interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S2728, when the demo display flag is not on but off (S2728: No), the result of the determination in the process of S2714 (S2714: Yes) means that the variation effect is completed. Therefore, if the confirmation command is not received even after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the variation effect, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d in order to start the restart effect. 1 is added to the restart timer counter initialized to 0 (S2729), and it is determined whether or not the value of the restart timer counter after the addition has reached a predetermined value (S2730).

Then, when the restart timer counter is not a predetermined value (S2730: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. When the restart timer counter is a predetermined value (S2730: Yes), the restart display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the additional data table buffer 233e and the transfer data table buffer 233f are filled with full data. By writing, the contents are cleared (S2731). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the restart effect is set in the time counter 233i (S2732), the value of the pointer 233 g is initialized to 0 (S2733), and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, in the display control device, a confirmation command (confirmed command) transmitted from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed with the end of the variation effect ( When the display confirmation command) is not received, the drawing content can be set so that the restart effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, as described above, the restart effect is an effect of displaying the image obtained by vibrating the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player can display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81. By visually recognizing that the third symbol is vibrated and displayed after the fluctuation of is stopped and displayed, it can be recognized that the stopped symbol has not been determined at that time.

After the last drawing content defined by the restart display data table is expanded, the drawing content is expanded again from the beginning of the restart display data table by the pointer update process described above. Therefore, the restart effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 or a new display variation pattern command is received. Here, the restart effect is to display the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in a manner of vibrating (oscillating) the third symbol around a predetermined position, and in the restart display data table, the third symbol is displayed. Only the drawing contents necessary to swing and display at least once are specified. Then, by repeatedly expanding the drawing contents from the beginning of the restart display data table, the restart effect of repeatedly vibrating the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this way, by setting the restart effect to cause the third symbol display device 81 to vibrate and display the third symbol, the restart display data table is caused to swing the third symbol at least once. Since it is only necessary to store the drawing contents required for display, the capacity required for storing the restart display data table can be kept small.

Further, if a display confirmation command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the restart display data table, the process of S2716 shown in FIG. 47 is performed and the display data table buffer is performed. A definite display data table is set in 233d. As a result, even during the restart effect, the stop display of the third symbol is made with the stop symbol indicated by the stop symbol determination flag in accordance with the reception of the display confirmation command, and the confirmation display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed.

Further, if a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2631 in FIG. 41A is performed and the display data is displayed. A display data table for variation is set in the table buffer 233d, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, if a display demo command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 while the restart effect is being performed by the start display data table, the process of S2621 in FIG. 40 (c) is performed and the display data table is displayed. A display data table for demonstration is set in the buffer 233d, and the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the restart effect, the confirmation command (display confirmation command) originally received from the main control device 110 is not received even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed due to the end of the variation effect. Since it is an effect displayed in some cases, there is a possibility that the confirmation command is not received even while the restart effect is displayed due to the influence of noise, malfunction, and the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if a display variation pattern command or a display demo command is received during the restart effect, the effect corresponding to the command can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Various effects on the third symbol display device 81 can be performed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

The simple display setting process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 38 (b)) is also the same as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, when a confirmation command (display confirmation command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on ends. It is stipulated that one of the images (either of FIGS. 15B and 15C) of the fluctuation image when the power is turned on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table in the display data table buffer 233i is performed. In addition, when the confirmation command (display confirmation command) that should be originally received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113 is not recognized after the production time of the fluctuation effect by the fluctuation image when the power is turned on is completed. Is performed to set the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, which specifies that the variation effect of the variation image when the power is turned on is restarted.

Further, in the comparison process, the fluctuation pattern instructed by the display variation pattern command is compared with the stop type instructed by the display stop type, and if they do not match, the symbol is removed as a stop symbol (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15). c) See).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3001: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S3002), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, is off as a result of the processing of S3001 (S3001: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S2603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3002), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). FIG. 49B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S3002).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S3101), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3101: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3102). In the process of S3102, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. .. Then, when it is determined by the process of S3102 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3102: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3102: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3103. Further, as a result of the processing of S3101, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3101: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3103.

In the process of S3103, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3103), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S3103: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3104), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S3103 (S3103: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S3105), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 39 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S2408 in FIG. 39 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S2409 in FIG. 39 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 39 to 43) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 44 to 48) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 50) (see S3001: No in FIG. 49 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 282.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, a normal image transfer setting process (S3003), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S3003).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f, the pointer 233 g updated by the pointer update process (S2711) of the display setting process (S2403) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S3201). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S3202), and if it is the transfer data information (S3202: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S3203) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3204), and the process proceeds to S3205.

Further, in the process of S3202, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S3202: No), the processes of S3203 and S3204 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3205. In the process of S3205, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3205), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3205: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3206).

In the process of S3206, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S3206 that the transfer process has not been completed (S3206: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3206: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3207. Further, as a result of the processing of S3205, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3205: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S3207.

In the process of S3207, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3207), and if the transfer start flag is on (S3207: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3208), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3203 is set as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to the process of S3216. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3207: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S3212). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S3212: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S3212: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S3213), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the destination (normal video RAM 236) is specified (S3214), the image data of the sprite indicated by the specified various information is used as the transfer target image, and then the process proceeds to S3216.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S3214, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3216, it is determined whether or not the image to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216). The discrimination in the processing of S3216 is performed by referring to the stored image discrimination flag 233j. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image is read from the stored image discrimination flag 233j, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236. If it is determined that the sprite is stored and the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

Then, as a result of the processing of S3216, if the transfer target image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3216: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S3216 (S3216: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image is set (S3217). As a result, the transfer data information of the image to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 is based on the transfer data information described in the drawing list. In addition, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S3217, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is updated (S3218), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image discrimination flag 233j, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image is set to "on", and the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is set. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites that are supposed to be stored to "off".

In this way, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing this normal image transfer process, the back image is changed. Of the image data used in the above, the image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233f in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 transfers to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233g of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f by executing the normal image transfer setting process. Since the transfer instruction of the target image is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. ..

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2406), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 21 is generated (S3301). That is, in the processing of S3301, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2404). Then, the specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k are transmitted to the image controller (S3302). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233k is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 281, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233k after the processing of S3302 (S3303). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 38) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of advance notice effects are performed in one variable effect. In each advance notice effect, the player is notified of the rank of the expected value that will be a big hit according to the pattern of the advance notice effect. In the first embodiment, which pattern is used to perform the advance notice effect is not determined in advance at once, but is determined for each advance notice effect. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect in each advance notice effect, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d and the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b provided for each pattern (rank indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit) are expected. When the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is determined to be equal to or less than the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to one rank by comparing in order from the highest rank, the pattern corresponding to the one rank is announced. Determined as the pattern of.

Here, every time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in one variation effect, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) is set in the second pointer 223f. .. Then, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, in comparing the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is the determination upper limit value pointer 222b. If it is determined that the value is larger than the value of, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the pattern (rank) is compared with the value of the second pointer 223f. As a result, when the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, the pattern at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

When the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of a certain pattern (rank) and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, a pattern of the same rank as that rank is determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variation effect. It means that it was done. When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal as in the present embodiment, the pattern of the rank to which the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is given is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect. By doing so, when the expectation level that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the variable production, in the next notice production (subsequent notice production), when the pattern of the notice production is determined, that It is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation of being a big hit than one rank.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the second pointer 223f as described above, when the expectation degree of becoming a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain advance notice effect during the variable effect, the next notice effect is shown. In (subsequent advance notice production), when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree that is a big hit than the one rank. Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of the jackpot, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a certain cut-in image. When is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, every time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set to the second pointer 223f, and when a new pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, When the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value of the second pointer 223f are equal, the pattern of the rank to which the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is given is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Each time a rank pattern is determined, the same judgment upper limit value is used without changing the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b so that a pattern with a rank lower than that rank is not selected as a notice effect pattern. Using the value of the pointer 222b, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variation effect. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for each type of non-selected rank, the storage capacity required for storing the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 53. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, when the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the advance notice effect, the pachinko machine 10 is performed before in the same variation effect. The configuration in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production is not selected is explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h gives notice. By changing the update range of the effect counter 223d, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, it is lower than the expectation level of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. The rank pattern is configured to be deselected.

In the second embodiment, the configuration other than the above, and other than the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135), the counter update process (S1913), and the command determination process (S1915) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The various processes executed by each control device are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is a counter that determines the maximum value that the notice effect counter 223d, which is a loop counter, can take. The advance notice effect counter 223d is updated while looping from 0 to a range of values indicated by the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. That is, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated by the counter update process (S1913) of the main process (FIG. 30). In this counter update process, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated by 1 each time the counter update process is executed. When the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d after addition becomes larger than the value stored in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0 to reduce the advance notice effect counter 223d. Update.

Here, when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d after addition becomes larger than the value stored in the maximum value memory 223h of the advance notice effect counter, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is returned to 0. Therefore, at some point, the advance notice effect counter Even when the value of the maximum value memory 223h is set to a value smaller than that of the advance notice effect counter 223d, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d can be set to 0 in the next update. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect counter 223d from becoming a value outside the range defined by the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h.

When a new value is set in the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the value of the newly set notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is smaller than the value of the notice effect counter 223d at that time. If it is, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d may be divided by the value of the newly set advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the remainder may be newly set in the advance notice effect counter 223d. This also prevents the advance notice effect counter 223d from becoming a value outside the range defined by the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. Further, in that case, the value set in the advance notice effect counter 223d is not fixed to 0, so that the randomness of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect can be improved.

The initial value "99" of the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is set in the RAM initial value setting process (S1810) executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 29) executed when the power is turned on. Further, although not shown, in the command determination process (FIG. 32), when a confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, that is, at the stage where the fluctuation effect is confirmed and displayed, the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h is displayed. The initial value "99" is set. As a result, the advance notice effect counter 223d is usually updated in the range of "0" to "99". In the command determination process, when a command other than the final command is received from the main control device 110, the same process as in the first embodiment is performed, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

On the other hand, each time a pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in one variable effect in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times, the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is the maximum value of the advance notice effect counter. It is set to the memory 223h (S2151 in FIG. 53). As a result, after that, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect counter 223d from being updated in the range in which a pattern having a rank lower than the determined pattern (rank) and having a lower expectation is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent advance notice production, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree, which is a big hit than the rank of the pattern once determined.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the details of the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135). This advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the advance notice effect process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of executing the advance notice effect pattern.

Of the notice effect rank determination processes, the processes of S2140 to S2142, S2143, and S2147 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. However, in the processing of S2142, if the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S2147 as it is. Then, the value of the determination rank counter 223e is subtracted by 1 (S2147), and the process returns to the process of S2141. As a result, next, the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d are compared with respect to the rank of the expectation degree that is the jackpot that is one rank lower, and the rank is given the advance notice effect. Judge whether or not to rank.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2142, when the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern for which the advance notice effect is performed to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), as a process different from the first embodiment, the determination upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143. The value is set to the maximum value memory 223h of the advance notice effect counter (S2151), and the advance notice effect rank determination process ends.

As a result, after that, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. That is, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect counter 223d from being updated in the range in which a pattern having a rank lower than the determined pattern (rank) and having a lower expectation is selected. Therefore, in the subsequent advance notice production, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree, which is a big hit than the rank of the pattern once determined.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and the advance notice effect counter 223d starts from 0 to the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory. It is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the range of the value of 223h. The maximum value memory 223h of the advance notice effect counter is normally set to "99", and the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated in the range of 0 to 99. Each time the pattern is determined, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. As a result, after that, the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated with the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern (rank) as the maximum value. A pattern corresponding to a rank with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the rank of the pattern can be deselected.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by using the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h as described above, when the expectation degree that becomes a big hit of one rank in a certain notice effect during the fluctuation effect is shown, the following In the advance notice effect (subsequent advance notice effect), when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, it is possible to deselect the pattern corresponding to the rank with a lower expectation degree, which is a big hit than the one rank. Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of the jackpot, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a certain cut-in image. When is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, each time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b given to the determined pattern is set in the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, so that the update range of the advance notice effect counter 223h is set. Can be set as the range in which the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a jackpot than the rank of the pattern once determined is deselected, so that the rank is determined each time the pattern of a certain rank is determined. Even if the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b is not changed so that the pattern of the lower rank is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, the same value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b is used in the same variation effect. It is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree, which is a jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production performed before. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b in the ROM 222 separately for each type of non-selected rank, the storage capacity required for storing the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is suppressed. At the same time, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect.

Further, in the first embodiment, there is a relatively high possibility that a pattern having the same rank as the previously selected pattern (rank) is selected as the advance notice effect, but in the second embodiment, it is relatively high. , There is a high possibility that a pattern with a higher rank than the pattern (rank) selected so far will be selected as the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to create more opportunities to give the player the impression that the expectation of becoming a big hit is increasing over a plurality of advance notice productions performed during one variable production.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment can exhibit the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 58. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first or second embodiment described above, when the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the second pointer 223f or the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h to determine the pattern of the notice effect. In the same variable effect, a configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect is not selected has been described.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the rank determination table 222c instead of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 is provided with the determination rank counter 223e and the second. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect by providing the determination rank memory 223i without providing the pointer 223f and the maximum value memory 223h of the advance notice effect effect, the advance notice effect is determined in the same variable effect. It is configured so that a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree, which is a big hit of the pattern, is not selected.

In the third embodiment, it is executed by each control device other than the above-mentioned configuration and the fluctuation setting process (S1914) and the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The various processes are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment or the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

The rank determination table 222c is a table in which different values of the advance notice effect counters 223d are associated with five ranks (that is, five patterns prepared for each advance notice effect) indicating expected values to be big hits. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, a pattern corresponding to the rank associated with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d at that time is extracted from the rank determination table 222c, and the extracted pattern is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect. To do. The rank determination table 222c is further divided into five tables.

Here, the details of the five tables prepared in the rank determination table 222c will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 56. First, FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the first rank determination table 222c1. The first rank determination table 222c1 is a big hit when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined, when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined first after the start of the variable effect, or in the case of the advance notice effect so far. This is a table that is referred to when only the pattern corresponding to "1" is determined for the rank of the degree of expectation.

In the first rank determination table 222c1, whether the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit or a miss, and whether the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A" or "normal reach". Different values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether the value is "A". In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit", the degree of expectation of the big hit is for ranks "1" to "5" regardless of the variable pattern of the variable effect. When the result of the variation effect in which the values of the different advance notice effect counters 223d are associated and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A". The "big hit" is the result of the variable effect in which different values of the advance notice effect counters 223d are associated with the ranks "1" to "4" in which the expectation of the big hit is performed, and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed. Further, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is "normal reach A", different values of the advance notice effect counters 223d are associated with ranks "1" to "3" for the expected degree of jackpot.

As a result, when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined first after the start of the variable effect, or in the advance notice effect so far, only the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined. If so, the pattern of the advance notice effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank "1".

Next, FIG. 55 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the second rank determination table 222c2. This second rank determination table 222c2 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined in the previous advance notice effect. It is a table.

Also in the second rank determination table 222c2, whether the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit or not, and whether the variation pattern of the variation effect is "Super Reach A" or " Different values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether it is "normal reach A". In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit", the degree of expectation of the big hit is against ranks "2" to "5" regardless of the variable pattern of the variable effect. When the result of the variation effect in which the values of the different advance notice effect counters 223d are associated and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A". The "big hit" is the result of the variable effect in which different values of the advance notice effect counters 223d are associated with the ranks "2" to "4" in which the expectation of the big hit is performed, and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed. Moreover, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is "normal reach A", different values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated with the ranks "2" to "3" of the expected degree of big hit.

As a result, in the previous advance notice production, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit corresponds to "2" is determined, the pattern corresponding to the rank "1" having a lower expectation degree than the rank "2". However, it is not selected as a pattern for the advance notice production.

Next, FIG. 56A is a schematic view schematically showing the third rank determination table 222c3. This third rank determination table 222c3 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined in the advance notice effect so far. It is a table.

Also in the third rank determination table 222c3, whether the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit or not, and whether the variation pattern of the variation effect is "Super Reach A" or " Different values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated with each rank (pattern) depending on whether it is "normal reach A". In addition, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit", the expectation of the big hit is against ranks "3" to "5" regardless of the variable pattern of the variable effect. When the result of the variation effect in which the values of the different advance notice effect counters 223d are associated and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "off" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A". The "big hit" is the result of the variable effect in which different values of the advance notice effect counters 223d are associated with the ranks "3" to "4" in which the expectation of the big hit is performed, and the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed. Moreover, when the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is "normal reach A", all the values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated with the rank "3" of the expectation degree of a big hit.

As a result, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree of the jackpot is "3" is determined in the advance notice production so far, the ranks "1" and "2" which are lower than the rank "3" are expected. The pattern corresponding to is not selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Further, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", the pattern of rank "3" is once selected. And, in the subsequent notice production, only the pattern of rank "3" is selected.

Next, FIG. 56B is a schematic view schematically showing the fourth rank determination table 222c4. This 4th rank determination table 222c4 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined in the previous advance notice effect. It is a table.

Also in the 4th rank determination table 222c4, the notice effect counter 223d differs depending on whether the result of the change effect in which the notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit or a miss (the variation pattern is only "Super Reach A"). Values are associated with each rank (pattern). If the result of the variation effect is out of order and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is not associated with any rank (pattern). .. This is because when the result of the variation effect is out of order and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A", only the patterns up to rank "3" can be selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Is.

In the fourth rank determination table 222c4, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit", the expectation degree of the big hit is the rank "big hit" regardless of the variation pattern of the variation effect. The values of different notice effect counters 223d are associated with "4" to "5", and the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "off", and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "off". In the case of "Super Reach A", all the values of the advance notice effect counter 223d are associated only with the expectation degree of big hit of rank "4".

As a result, in the previous advance notice production, if the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined as "4", the ranks "1" to "3" having a lower degree of expectation than the rank "4" are determined. The pattern corresponding to is not selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Further, when the result of the variation effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is "big hit" and the variation pattern of the variation effect is "super reach A", the pattern of rank "4" is once selected. Then, in the subsequent advance notice production, only the pattern of rank "4" is selected.

Next, FIG. 56 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the fifth rank determination table 222c5. This fifth rank determination table 222c5 is referred to in the case of determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is determined in the advance notice effect so far. It is a table.

In the fifth rank determination table 222c5, when the result of the variable effect in which the advance notice effect for determining the pattern is performed is a big hit, the advance notice effect counter 223d is only for the pattern in which the expectation degree of the big hit corresponds to the rank "5". All values of are associated. As a result, if the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree of the jackpot is "5" is determined in the advance notice production so far, the ranks "1" to "4" having a lower expectation degree than the rank "5" The pattern corresponding to is not selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

If the result of the variation effect is different, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in any rank (pattern) regardless of whether the variation pattern of the variation effect is "normal reach A" or "super reach A". Not associated. This is because, when the result of the variation effect is out of order, only the patterns up to the rank "3" or "4" can be selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect according to the variation pattern.

The determination rank memory 223i is a memory that stores the rank of the degree of expectation that is the jackpot of the pattern determined by the advance notice effect in one variation effect. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the MPU 221 grasps the rank of the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect up to that point from the value of the determination rank memory 223i, and uses the determined rank from the determined rank. The rank determination table 222c to be used is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5.

For example, when the determination rank memory 223i is "1", the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "2", the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

As described above, when the first rank judgment table 222c1 is selected as the rank judgment table 222c to be used, the pattern of the advance notice effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank "1" of the expected degree of big hit. When another rank judgment table, that is, the nth rank judgment table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank judgment table 222c to be used, it corresponds to a rank with a lower expectation that is a big hit than the rank "n". The pattern to be used is not selected as the pattern for the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot, which is lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect, from being selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

The determination rank memory 223i is set to "1" as an initial value when the variation effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A is started. As a result, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect for the first time after the start of the variable effect, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1, so that the rank of the expectation that becomes a big hit is the lowest. The pattern of the advance notice production can be determined including the pattern corresponding to "1".

Further, in the determination rank memory 223i, every time the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined in one variation effect, the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit indicated by the determined pattern is set. As a result, the determination rank memory 223i can memorize the rank of the degree of expectation that is the jackpot of the pattern determined by the advance notice effect in one variation effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the details of the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is used for the display variation pattern command and the display as in the first embodiment. The process of setting the stop type command to be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114, the process of setting the display hold ball number command to notify the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls, and the determined detailed details. When the fluctuation pattern is normal reach A or super reach A for performing the advance notice effect, processing related to the control of the advance notice effect is performed.

In this variation setting process, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed in the processes of S2101 to S2110 and S2114. However, in the processing of S2109, if it is determined that the detailed fluctuation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), the advance notice effect flag 223c is set to ON. Later (S2110), in the third embodiment, "1" is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2171), the variation setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process. As a result, when the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined for the first time after that, the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined using the first rank determination table 222c1, so that it corresponds to "1", which has the lowest expected degree of jackpot. It is possible to determine the pattern of the advance notice production including the pattern to be performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the details of the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135). This advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the advance notice effect process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of executing the advance notice effect pattern.

In this advance notice effect rank determination process, first, the rank determination table 222c corresponding to the rank indicated by the determination rank memory 223i is set from the first to fifth rank determination tables 222c1 to c5 (S2181), and the set rank determination table 222c is set. Therefore, a pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot associated with the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is determined as the advance notice effect pattern (S2182). Then, the rank of the determined pattern is set in the determination rank memory 223i (S2183), and the advance notice effect rank determination process is completed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, the judgment rank memory 223i is provided, and in the judgment rank memory 223i, in one variation effect, the jackpot of the pattern determined by the previous notice effect is achieved. Memorize the rank of expectation that becomes. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, the rank of the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect up to that point is grasped from the value of this judgment rank memory 223i, and the rank to be used is determined from the grasped rank. The table 222c is selected from the first rank determination table 222c1 to the fifth rank determination table 222c5. That is, when the determination rank memory 223i is "1", the first rank determination table 222c1 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "2", the second rank determination table 222c2 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "3", the third rank determination table 222c3 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "4", the fourth rank determination table 222c4 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used. When the determination rank memory 223i is "5", the fifth rank determination table 222c5 is selected as the rank determination table 222c to be used.

Here, when the first rank judgment table 222c1 is selected as the rank judgment table 222c to be used, the pattern of the advance notice effect is selected including the pattern corresponding to the rank "1" of the expectation degree which becomes a big hit. When another rank judgment table, that is, the nth rank judgment table (n is 2 to 5) is selected as the rank judgment table 222c to be performed, it corresponds to a rank with a lower expectation that is a big hit than the rank "n". The pattern is not selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expected degree of jackpot, which is lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect, from being selected as the pattern of the advance notice effect.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

Further, in the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22, when the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect is shown, the game The person may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. If the player has such an idea, in order to increase the motivation to participate in the game, in the advance notice production, the expectation that the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is matched will be shown as a big hit. Even so, the player may not operate the frame button 22 and may rather reduce the willingness to participate in the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rank of the expectation degree that becomes the jackpot of the pattern determined by the advance notice production is grasped, and the rank determination table 222c to be used is selected from the grasped rank as the first rank determination table 222c1. ~ By selecting from the 5th rank judgment table 222c5, a pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that is a jackpot lower than the rank indicated by the pattern determined in the advance notice effect is selected as the advance notice effect pattern. It can be prevented from being done. Further, in the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, the cut-in image is displayed each time the operation instruction is received, and each time the cut-in image is displayed. The display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to show the player the expectation of the jackpot, but even in the notice production by the cut-in 155, the expectation of the jackpot of one rank in a certain cut-in image. When is shown, in the subsequent cut-in image, the pattern corresponding to the rank with the lower expectation of being a big hit than the one rank can be deselected.

As a result, after the degree of expectation that will be a big hit of one rank is shown in a certain notice production during the fluctuation production, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or from that one rank The pattern corresponding to the rank with high expectation that will be a big hit is selected. Therefore, in a plurality of advance notice productions performed in one variable production, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low after the high expectation of a big hit is shown, so that the player is distracted. Can be suppressed.

In addition, since the expectation of a big hit is maintained or increased over a plurality of advance notices performed in one variable production, the player expects that the expectation of a big hit will increase. In other words, it is possible to pay attention to the advance notice production while expecting the so-called upstart. Further, for the advance notice effect of displaying an image showing the expected degree of jackpot by operating the frame button 22, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 in anticipation of the rise. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, in the third embodiment, in one variable effect, it is necessary to prepare a rank determination table according to the rank of the expected degree that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 222 is stored. However, it is possible to finely set the probability that a pattern with a high degree of expectation will be selected according to the rank of the degree of expectation that will be the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production so far. it can. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that a pattern with a high expectation rank will be selected so that the player's interest will be more enjoyed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that can further entertain the player by the advance notice effect. Can be designed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to second embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to second embodiments. be able to.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, when a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variation effect, the same variation is used when determining a certain notice effect pattern. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice production in the production, in the multiple notice production performed during the one variable production. After the high expectation of a big hit was shown, the configuration for preventing the low expectation of a big hit was explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, when a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the expected degree of jackpot are performed in one variable effect, the expected degree of jackpot in a certain advance notice effect becomes a predetermined rank or higher. Only in this case, as the pattern of the subsequent advance notice effect, a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect shall be deselected. In a plurality of advance notice productions performed during one variable production, it is possible to prevent the jackpot expectation from becoming lower than the predetermined rank after the jackpot expectation is shown to be higher than the predetermined rank. It is configured as follows.

In the fourth embodiment, each configuration other than the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation setting process (S1914) and the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The various processes executed by the control device are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 59, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is further provided with the high rank determined flag 223j as compared with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

The high rank determined flag 223j is a variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the expected degree of big hit are performed, and the expected degree of big hit in a certain advance notice effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (rank "4" in the fourth embodiment). Alternatively, it is a flag indicating that the pattern indicating "5") has been selected. When the high rank determined flag 223j is on, in a variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the expected degree of big hit are performed, the expected degree of big hit in the previous advance notice effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank (rank "4" or It indicates that the pattern indicating "5") has been selected. In addition, when the high rank determined flag 223j is off, in the variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the expected degree of big hit are performed, the expected degree of big hit in the previous advance notice effect is equal to or higher than the predetermined rank (rank "4"). "Or" 5 ") is not selected, that is, a pattern of less than a predetermined rank (any of ranks" 1 "to" 3 ") is selected.

The high rank determined flag 223j determines a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received from the main controller 110. In that case, the advance notice effect flag 223c is set to be on according to the determined detailed fluctuation pattern, and is temporarily turned off by the MPU 221. Specifically, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the high rank determination is made in accordance with the setting of the advance notice effect flag 223c to ON. The finished flag 223j is temporarily set to off.

Then, when the pattern in one notice effect is selected, if the high rank determined flag 223j is off, the pattern of the notice effect considers the pattern of the advance notice effect executed during the same variation effect. Without doing so, one pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5". That is, if the pattern of the advance notice effect executed during the same variable effect is a pattern corresponding to any of the ranks "1" to "3" with a low expectation of being a big hit, the rank " One pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to "1" to "5". Therefore, in this case, it is allowed that the expectation degree of the jackpot becomes lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation degree of the predetermined rank or higher is shown as the expectation degree of the jackpot in one notice production.

When selecting the pattern in one notice effect, if the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree of big hit is "4" or "5" is selected, the high rank determination flag 223j is set to ON. Then, when selecting a pattern for the advance notice effect to be performed after that, if the high rank determined flag 223j is turned on, the pattern of the advance notice effect is the same as in the first to third embodiments. A pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot indicated by the pattern determined for the previously performed advance notice effect is not selected.

As a result, if an expectation of a predetermined rank or higher (rank "4" or "5") is shown as an expectation to be a big hit in a plurality of advance notices performed during one variable production, then the jackpot will be obtained. It is possible to prevent the degree of expectation from becoming lower than the predetermined rank (rank "4"). Therefore, during a certain variation effect, after the expectation level of a predetermined rank or higher, which is highly expected to be a big hit, is shown in the advance notice effect, the expectation level lower than the predetermined rank is generated by the advance notice effect performed after that in the variation effect. It can be prevented from being shown. Therefore, after an expectation level of a predetermined rank or higher, which is highly expected to be a big hit during a certain variation effect, is shown in the advance notice effect, an expectation degree lower than the predetermined rank is shown by the advance notice effect performed after that in the variation effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the details of the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the first embodiment, and the variation setting process of the first embodiment. The same process as (see FIG. 33) is executed.

Specifically, among the fluctuation setting processes, the processes of S2101 to S2113 are the same as those of the first embodiment. Therefore, specific description of these processes will be omitted. In the variation setting process according to the fourth embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S2109 that the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), the first After the same processing of S210 to S2113 as in the embodiment is performed, the high rank determined flag 223j is set to off (S4001), and the variation setting processing is terminated.

The processing of S210 to S2113 and S4001 is when the normal reach A or super reach A, which is a variation pattern for executing a plurality of advance notice effects, is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on in this variation setting process. , This is a process for initializing the parameters for determining the pattern of each advance notice effect executed in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization process, by setting the high rank determined flag 223j to off, the ranks "1" to "5" are determined when the pattern of the advance notice effect to be executed at least first after the variation effect is started is determined. It is possible to select one pattern from the patterns corresponding to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the details of the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this notice effect rank determination process (S2135). This advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the advance notice effect process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of executing the advance notice effect pattern.

Of the notice effect rank determination processes, the processes of S2140 to 2147 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. However, in the processing of S2142, if the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the high rank judgment flag 223j Determines whether or not is on (S4101). Then, if the high rank determined flag 223j is on (S4101: Yes), the processes of S2145 to S2147 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the process returns to the process of S2141 after the process of S2147.

Further, in the processing of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146. When the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is determined to be equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern for which the advance notice effect is to be performed to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), it is determined whether or not the high rank determination flag 223j is on (S4102). Then, if the high rank determined flag 223j is on (S4102: Yes), the same process of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, when the high rank determined flag 223j is on, that is, when the pattern corresponding to the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit is "4" or "5" is selected in the advance notice production up to that point. Similar to the first embodiment, in the subsequent advance notice effect, when the pattern in the advance notice effect is selected, the pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed so far. Can be deselected.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if the high rank determined flag 223j is not on but off (S4101: No), the processes of S2145 and S2146 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2147. As a result, regardless of the rank of the advance notice effect that has been performed so far, the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d are used for the rank of the expected degree that is the next lower rank. It is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is the rank of the pattern for performing the advance notice effect. Therefore, while the high rank determined flag 223j is off, that is, the advance notice effect executed up to that point during the variable effect shows a low rank as a big hit expectation, or the advance notice effect is performed even once. If not, one pattern will be selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5".

Further, in the process of S4102, if the high rank determined flag 223j is not on but off (S4102: No), is the rank of the advance notice effect determined in the process of S2143 "4" or "5"? It is determined whether or not (S4103), and if the determined rank is not "4" or "5" but "1" to "3" (S4103: No), the advance notice production rank determination process is terminated as it is. To do. As a result, the processing of S4104, which will be described later, is skipped, so that the high rank determined flag 223j is kept off, and the next advance notice effect also corresponds to ranks "1" to "5". One pattern is selected from the patterns to be used.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4103, when it is determined that the rank of the advance notice effect determined in the processing of S2143 is "4" or "5" (S4103: Yes), the high rank determined flag 223j is turned on. Is set to (S4104). Then, the same process of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank determined by the process of S2143 is set in the second pointer 223f, and the advance notice effect rank determination process is completed. As a result, when a pattern having a jackpot expectation rank of "4" or higher ("4" or "5") is selected in the advance notice effect, the pattern in the advance notice effect is selected in the subsequent advance notice effect. In this case, it is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production performed so far.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, in the variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects are performed, the rank of the expectation degree that becomes a big hit as one notice effect pattern is a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “4” or “ When the pattern corresponding to 5 ”) is selected, when selecting a pattern for the advance notice effect performed after that, the pattern determined for the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect A pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot indicated by is not selected.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, despite the high expectation that it would be a big hit in the previous notice production, the low expectation was shown in the notice production performed at the end of the fluctuation production, and it was finally disappointing in the fluctuation production. If this happens, the player's disappointment will be so great that he may lose the motivation to continue the game.

On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, in the variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects are performed, the rank of the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit as one notice effect pattern is set to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”). When the corresponding pattern is selected, when selecting a pattern for the advance notice effect performed after that, the expectation level that becomes a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect. Since a pattern with a lower rank is not selected, the expectation of a predetermined rank or higher (rank "4" or "5") as a big hit expectation in a plurality of advance notices performed during one variation production is performed. Once indicated, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a jackpot from becoming lower than a predetermined rank (rank "4") thereafter. Therefore, during a certain variation effect, after the expectation level of a predetermined rank or higher, which is highly expected to be a big hit, is shown in the advance notice effect, the expectation level lower than the predetermined rank is generated by the advance notice effect performed after that in the variation effect. It can be prevented from being shown. Therefore, after an expectation level of a predetermined rank or higher, which is highly expected to be a big hit during a certain variation effect, is shown in the advance notice effect, an expectation degree lower than the predetermined rank is shown by the advance notice effect performed after that in the variation effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the advance notice effect by the comment display 151 and the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, which are performed before the super reach fluctuation (see FIG. 8), a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”” is used. When the pattern corresponding to) is selected, only the reach type (thunder reach or Buddha reach) of a predetermined rank or higher can be selected as the reach type of the super reach variation. That is, in this case, it can be guaranteed that the reach species will be of a predetermined rank or higher. In general, players tend to place the highest priority on the level of expectation that the reach type of super reach fluctuation will be a big hit, among many advance notice effects. That is, the player will be greatly delighted by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. Therefore, when a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher ("4" or "5") is selected in the notice effect by the comment display 151 or the advance notice effect by the child character appearance 152, which is performed before the super reach fluctuation, the super By assuring the player that a reach type (thunder reach or Buddha reach) of a predetermined rank or higher appears as the reach type of the reach fluctuation, the player can start the super reach fluctuation with a certain sense of security. You can watch over.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effects as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. be able to.

In addition, in a variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects are performed, when a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) in the expected degree of jackpot, which is a big hit pattern, is selected as one advance notice effect pattern. In addition to the fourth embodiment, after that, a part or all of the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 may be non-executed. In addition, after a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) in the expected degree of jackpot, which is a big hit, is selected as one notice effect pattern, the frame button 22 is operated to perform a row. If the frame button 22 is operated, the advance notice effect is performed for a part or all of the notice effect, but the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 may be hidden on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, while a notice production with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed, for example, while a super reach fluctuation is being performed by a reach species with a high expectation of a big hit, the notice production and the super reach fluctuation are performed. It is possible to concentrate the players, and it is possible to further increase the expectation that the players will be a big hit.

Further, it is performed by operating the frame button 22 after selecting a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) in the expected degree of jackpot as one notice effect pattern. If the frame button 22 is operated for a part or all of the notice effect, the notice effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is hidden on the third symbol display device 81, the frame is displayed. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect to be performed when the button 22 is operated, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed before that is not selected. May be good.

As described above, when the advance notice effect of displaying the image showing the expectation degree of the jackpot by operating the frame button 22 shows an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effect. , The player may think that the expectation of a big hit has decreased just by operating the frame button 22. On the other hand, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect to be performed when the frame button 22 is operated, the rank is lower than the expectation level of the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed before that. By deselecting the pattern, the advance notice effect maintains or increases the expectation of the jackpot shown in the previous advance notice effects, so that the player has an increased expectation of the jackpot. The frame button 22 can be operated in anticipation of this, that is, expecting a so-called upstart. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

Further, in a variable effect in which a plurality of advance notice effects are performed, when a pattern corresponding to a predetermined rank or higher (“4” or “5”) in the expected degree of jackpot, which is a big hit pattern, is selected as one advance notice effect pattern. After that, when a part or all of the advance notice effect (for example, the advance notice effect by the cut-in 155) performed by operating the frame button 22 is not executed, or when the frame button 22 is operated. If the frame button 22 is operated for a part or all of the notice effect, the notice effect is performed, but when the image prompting the operation of the frame button 22 is hidden on the third symbol display device 81, the frame is displayed. Instead of or in addition to the execution of the advance notice effect by operating the button 22, the advance notice effect may be automatically performed when a predetermined time arrives. Then, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect performed automatically, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed before that may be deselected. .. As a result, while a notice production with a high expectation of a big hit is being performed, for example, while a super reach fluctuation is being performed by a reach species with a high expectation of a big hit, the notice production and the super reach fluctuation are performed. While concentrating the players, the automatic advance notice production can give a sense of expectation that the expectation of a big hit may increase further without decreasing. Therefore, the player can further increase the expectation of becoming a big hit, and can enhance the interest in the game.

Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 65. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to third embodiments described above, when a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variation effect, the same variation is used when determining a certain notice effect pattern. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous notice production in the production, in the multiple notice production performed during the one variable production. After the high expectation of a big hit was shown, the configuration for preventing the low expectation of a big hit was explained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, only during the super reach fluctuation, the super By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed before in the reach fluctuation, in the notice production performed during the super reach fluctuation, the super reach It is configured to prevent the expectation of a jackpot from becoming lower than the expectation of a variable reach species.

In the fifth embodiment, the configuration other than the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation setting process (S1914), the notice effect process (S1909), and the notice effect executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. The various processes executed by each control device other than the rank determination process (S2135) are the same as those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and their illustration and description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 62, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is further provided with the super reach fluctuation flag 223k as compared with the RAM 223 of the first embodiment.

The super reach fluctuation flag 223k indicates that the super reach fluctuation, which is a part of the fluctuation production, is started during the execution of the fluctuation production in which a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit are performed, and the super reach fluctuation is performed. It is a flag indicating that it is being used. When this super reach fluctuation flag 223k is turned on during the execution of a fluctuation effect in which a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation to be a big hit are performed, the super reach variation which is a part of the fluctuation effect is started, and the super Indicates that reach fluctuations are taking place. In addition, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is off during the execution of a variation effect in which a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit are performed, the super reach variation which is a part of the variation effect is not started, and Indicates that no super reach fluctuation has occurred.

The detailed fluctuation pattern of the super reach fluctuation flag 223k was determined based on the detailed fluctuation pattern counter 223b and the detailed fluctuation pattern table 222a when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command were received from the main controller 110. In this case, the advance notice effect flag 223c is temporarily turned off by the MPU 221 in accordance with the determined detailed fluctuation pattern. Specifically, when the determined detailed variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the advance notice effect is performed a plurality of times during the change effect, the super reach variation is set in accordance with the advance notice effect flag 223c being set to ON. The flag 223k is once set to off.

Then, the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is set to ON at the timing when the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 performed at the start of the super reach fluctuation is performed. Further, when the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is turned on, the rank of the pattern selected for the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153, that is, the determination rank counter at the timing when the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 is performed. The value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by 223e is set in the second pointer 223f.

When the pattern in one notice effect is selected, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is off, the pattern of the notice effect does not consider the pattern of the previous notice effect executed during the same change effect. , 1 pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to the ranks "1" to "5". That is, for the advance notice effects (comment display 151, child character appearance 152, and each advance notice effect of super reach selection 153) that are executed before the start of the super reach fluctuation, the patterns corresponding to ranks "1" to "5". One pattern will be selected from among. Therefore, in the advance notice production, it is allowed that the expectation degree of the jackpot becomes lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation degree of the predetermined rank or higher is shown as the expectation degree of the jackpot.

On the other hand, when selecting a pattern in one advance notice effect, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on, when selecting a pattern for the advance notice effect to be performed after that, the patterns of the advance notice effect are the first to first. Similar to the third embodiment, the rank is lower than the expectation of a big hit indicated by the pattern determined for the previously performed advance notice effect in the super reach fluctuation including the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. Deselect the pattern.

As a result, in a plurality of advance notice effects performed during one variation effect, when the super reach variation is started, the expectation level of a big hit becomes at least lower than the expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach variation. Can be prevented. Therefore, since the expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach variation can be maintained at the minimum and the expectation level can be shown to the player, the player can exceed the expectation level indicated by the reach species during the super reach variation. By showing a low degree of expectation by the advance notice production, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the details of the variation setting process (S1914) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing this variation setting process (S1914). This variation setting process (S1914) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 as in the first embodiment, and the variation setting process of the first embodiment. The same process as (see FIG. 33) is executed.

Specifically, among the fluctuation setting processes, the processes of S2101 to S2113 are the same as those of the first embodiment. Therefore, specific description of these processes will be omitted. In the variation setting process according to the fifth embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S2109 that the detailed variation pattern determined in S2104 is the normal reach A or the super reach A that performs the advance notice effect (S2109: Yes), the first After the same processing of S210 to S2113 as in the embodiment is performed, the super reach variation flag 223k is set to off (S4201), and the variation setting process is terminated.

In the processing of S210 to S2113 and S4201, when normal reach A or super reach A, which is a variation pattern for executing a plurality of advance notice effects, is determined as a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect to be executed from now on in this variation setting process. , This is a process for initializing the parameters for determining the pattern of each notice effect executed in the variable effect by the normal reach A or the super reach A. In this initialization process, by setting the super reach fluctuation flag 223k to off, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect from the start of the variation effect to the execution of the super reach variation, ranks "1" to "1" to " It is possible to select one pattern from the patterns corresponding to "5".

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the details of the advance notice effect processing (S1909) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing this advance notice effect processing (S1909). This advance notice effect process (S1909) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 30), and as described above, when the variable effect is performed by the normal reach A or the super reach A, the advance notice effect is performed during the variable effect. Is the process for executing.

Of this advance notice effect processing, the processing of S2131 to S2138 is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. However, in the processing of S2138, if it is currently determined that it is the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 (S2138: Yes), the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is set to ON (S4301), and the determination rank is further increased. The value of the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b indicated by the counter 223e is set in the second pointer 223f (S4302), and the process proceeds to S2136.

In the process of S4302, the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b set for the second pointer 223f, that is, the judgment upper limit value pointer corresponding to the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e at the execution timing of the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154. The value of 222b is the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153.

Therefore, the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is set to ON by the processing of S4301, and the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is set to the second pointer 223f by the processing of S4302. In the advance notice effect rank determination process (see FIG. 65), the advance notice effect (notice effect by cut-in 155) performed after the advance notice effect by the character appearance 154 is at least a jackpot indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. A pattern with a rank showing an expectation lower than the expectation can be deselected.

Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the details of the advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this notice effect rank determination process (S2135). This advance notice effect rank determination process (S2135) is executed in the advance notice effect process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a process of executing the advance notice effect pattern.

Of the notice effect rank determination processes, the processes of S2140 to 2147 are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here. However, in the processing of S2142, when the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: No), the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is turned on. Whether or not it is determined (S4401). Then, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on (S4401: Yes), the processes of S2145 to S2147 are executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the process returns to the process of S2141 after the process of S2147.

Further, in the processing of S2142, when it is determined that the value A of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e (S2142: Yes), or S2146. When the value U of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank indicated by the judgment rank counter 223e is determined to be equal to the value S of the second pointer 223f (S2146: Yes), the same as in the first embodiment. After determining the rank of the pattern for which the advance notice effect is to be performed to the rank indicated by the determination rank counter 223e (S2143), it is determined whether or not the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on (S4402). Then, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on (S4402: Yes), the same processing of S2144 as in the first embodiment is executed.

As a result, when the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is on, that is, when the super reach fluctuation is in progress, as in the first embodiment, when the pattern in the advance notice effect is selected, until then during the super reach fluctuation. It is possible to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined for the advance notice effect performed in. Further, by the process of S4302 of the advance notice effect process of FIG. 64, the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b corresponding to the rank of the reach type determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153 is set for the second pointer 223f. Therefore, due to the processing of S2145 and S2146, the notice effect (preliminary effect by cut-in 155) executed during the super reach fluctuation becomes a bigger hit than the rank of the reach type determined in the advance notice effect by the super reach selection 153. Patterns with low expectations rank are at least unselected.

On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is not on but off (S4401: No), the processes of S2145 and S2146 are skipped and the process proceeds to S2147. As a result, regardless of the rank of the advance notice effect that has been performed so far, the value U of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d are used for the rank of the expected degree that is the next lower rank. It is compared with A, and it is determined whether or not the rank is the rank of the pattern for performing the advance notice effect. Therefore, while the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is off, that is, the advance notice effect (comment display 151, child character appearance 152, and advance notice effect by super reach selection 153) performed before the super reach change is ranked "1". 1 pattern is selected from the patterns corresponding to ~ "5".

Further, in the processing of S4402, if the super reach fluctuation flag 223k is not on but off (S4402: No), the processing of S2144 is skipped and the advance notice effect rank determination processing is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, as a certain advance notice effect pattern only during the super reach variation In the super reach fluctuation, patterns with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice production are not selected.

As described above, for a plurality of advance notice effects to be executed during one variable effect, each advance notice effect pattern is different, such as when the player receives an operation instruction of the frame button 22 and when the advance notice effect is started. In some cases, a high-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in one advance notice effect, and then a low-ranked jackpot expectation is shown in another noticed effect in the same variable effect. When such a case occurs, the player is disappointed to realize that it may actually be unlikely to be a big hit, even though the expectation for being a big hit has been raised. There is a risk that the interest in the game will be diminished. In particular, the player tends to place the highest priority on the degree of expectation that the reach type of the super reach fluctuation will be a big hit, among the many advance notice effects. That is, the player will be greatly delighted by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. If the advance notice performed during the super reach fluctuation shows an expectation lower than the jackpot expectation indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation, the player's disappointment becomes great.

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, the super reach variation is used as a certain advance notice effect pattern only during the super reach variation. Since the pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the notice production performed before is not selected, the reach type of the super reach fluctuation is performed in the notice production performed during the super reach fluctuation. It is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming lower than the expectation of. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his interest by showing the expectation level lower than the jackpot expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach variation by the advance notice effect performed during the super reach variation.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect performed during the super reach fluctuation, the degree of expectation that the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed before the super reach change will be a big hit. Since the pattern of the lower rank is not selected, the expectation level indicated by the pattern of the advance notice effect is maintained or increased by the expectation level indicated by the previous advance notice effect. Therefore, the player watches the advance notice production in the expectation that the expectation of the big hit will increase, so that the expectation of the big hit can be improved as the variable production progresses. Further, in the present embodiment, in the advance notice effect (notice effect by cut-in 155) performed during the super reach fluctuation, the operation instruction of the frame button 22 is accepted many times during the frame button operation acceptance period, and each time the operation instruction is accepted. The cut-in image is displayed on the screen, and each time the cut-in image is displayed, the display color of the cut-in frame 174 is determined to indicate the expected degree of jackpot to the player. Then, in the advance notice production by this cut-in 155, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of the big hit of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect is not selected, so that the player is given a big hit. The frame button 22 can be positively operated with the expectation that the degree of expectation will increase. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to participate in the game and to continue the game.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same effect as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments based on the same components as the pachinko machine 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. be able to.

In the fifth embodiment, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one change effect, only during the super reach change, as a certain notice effect pattern, the front in the super reach change. It was configured to deselect a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production performed in, but the reach type of the super reach fluctuation is a predetermined rank or higher (for example, rank " Only when it is a reach species showing the degree of expectation of "4" or "5"), it is decided in the notice production performed before in the super reach change as the pattern of the notice effect performed during the super reach change. It may be configured to deselect a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern. As a result, when a reach species of a predetermined rank or higher develops into a super reach, a pattern of a predetermined rank or higher is selected by the advance notice effect at least during the fluctuation of the super reach. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low in the subsequent advance notice after the super reach fluctuation is performed in the reach species with a rank of at least a predetermined rank or higher and the expectation of a big hit is shown to be high. It is possible to prevent a person from being distracted.

The "third symbol" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "identification information" described in the claims, and the "variation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "variation effect" described in the claims. Corresponds to "dynamic display of identification information".

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

For example, in each of the above embodiments, it corresponds to a specific rank (for example, the rank of expectation to be a big hit is "4") in the advance notice production performed before developing into super reach fluctuation such as comment display 151 and child character appearance 152. In the subsequent super reach selection 153, the reach type corresponding to the specific rank (“thunder reach” in the above example) is selected as the reach type of the super reach fluctuation, and the notice by the character appearance 154 is given. In the production, a pattern in which a character corresponding to the specific rank (“thunder-like” in the above example) appears may be selected. In addition, if there is a variation effect pattern that develops from a super reach variation to a special reach variation that indicates that the jackpot probability is higher, a specific rank (for example, for example) is used in the advance notice effect that is performed before the special reach variation develops. When a pattern corresponding to a jackpot expectation rank of "4") appears, select the reach type corresponding to the specific rank as the reach type of the special reach fluctuation, or display it during the special reach fluctuation. A character corresponding to a specific rank may be selected as the character. In addition, in the advance notice effect performed before the normal reach fluctuation (in this embodiment, the advance notice effect by the comment display 151), a pattern corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation degree to be a big hit is "4") appears. In this case, in the advance notice effect (notice effect by the appearance of the child character 152) performed during the normal reach, the pattern corresponding to the specific rank may be selected. As a result, if the advance notice shows the expectation of a specific rank (highly expected rank that will be a big hit) at an early stage, the reach type of super reach fluctuation (or special reach fluctuation) or super reach fluctuation ( Alternatively, in the advance notice effect (characters appearing during the super reach fluctuation, the normal reach fluctuation, or the special reach fluctuation) performed in the normal reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation, at least the expected degree of a specific rank can be secured and shown. Further, in this case, further, during the super reach fluctuation (or the normal reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation), a notice effect (for example, by cut-in 155) is performed based on the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player. It may be configured not to perform the advance notice production). As a result, if the advance notice shows the expectation of a specific rank (a rank with a high expectation of becoming a big hit) at an early stage, the super reach fluctuation (or normal reach fluctuation or special reach fluctuation) corresponding to the specific rank will be changed. ), And while the super reach (or normal reach or special reach) corresponding to the specific rank is performed, the advance notice effect performed based on the operation instruction of the frame button 22 by the player is not executed. , The player's interest can be focused on the super reach fluctuation (or normal reach fluctuation or special reach fluctuation) corresponding to the specific rank. Therefore, the player can raise the expectation for the big hit. In this case, one or more notice effects should be automatically performed during the super reach fluctuation (or normal reach fluctuation or special reach fluctuation) so that the expectation of a big hit does not decrease in the notice production. Then, the pattern may be determined so that the rank of the expectation that becomes a big hit is maintained or increased. As a result, it is possible to show the player how the expectation of becoming a big hit is automatically raised during the super reach fluctuation (or the normal reach fluctuation or the special reach fluctuation), so that the player's interest can be further enhanced. Can be done.

In each of the above embodiments, when determining the pattern of the advance notice effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed advance notice effect in the same variable effect is not selected. However, instead of this, for the notice effect performed after a certain notice effect, a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation level that is a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed notice effect. May be non-selected. For example, except for the comment display 151 and the notice effect by the child character appearance 152, the notice effect executed after the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 (in each of the above embodiments, the notice effect by the super reach selection 153 and the cut-in 155 are used. In the advance notice effect (if it is performed multiple times, all the advance notice effects), the rank is lower than the expectation that the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect will be a big hit. The pattern may be deselected. In addition, if there is a variation effect pattern that develops from a super reach variation to a special reach variation indicating that the jackpot probability is higher, the same in the advance notice effect performed after the advance notice effect for selecting the reach type of the special reach. In the variable effect of the above, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice effect performed before may be deselected. In addition, in the advance notice effect performed after the normal reach fluctuation, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variation effect is not selected. It may be configured. As a result, when it develops into super reach (or when it develops into special reach or when it becomes normal reach), at least during the super reach fluctuation (or during special reach fluctuation or during normal reach fluctuation). After a certain notice production shows the expectation that it will be a big hit of one rank, in the subsequent notice production, the pattern corresponding to the same rank as that one rank or the expectation that it will be a big hit than that one rank The pattern corresponding to the higher rank is selected. Therefore, in the advance notice production performed during the super reach fluctuation (or during the special reach fluctuation or the normal reach fluctuation) where the expectation of the jackpot increases, the expectation of the jackpot will be high after the expectation of the jackpot is high. Since it is possible to prevent the degree from becoming low, it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted.

In addition, instead of this, when a reach type (“thunder reach”) corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of expectation to be a big hit is “4”) is selected in the advance notice production by the super reach selection 153. As long as it is, in the notice effect to be executed after that, that is, the notice effect by the cut-in 155 (if it is performed multiple times, all the notice effects), it is decided in the notice effect that was performed before in the same variable effect A pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern may be deselected. In addition, in the advance notice effect for selecting the reach type of the special reach, only when the reach type corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of the expectation degree to be a big hit is "4") is selected, the advance notice to be executed thereafter In the production, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice production in the same variable production may be deselected. In addition, only when a pattern corresponding to a specific rank (for example, the rank of expectation to be a big hit is "4") is selected in the first advance notice effect performed during the normal reach, in the advance notice effect to be executed thereafter. , In the same variable effect, a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect may be deselected. As a result, if a specific rank reach species develops into super reach or special reach, or if a notice production of a specific rank pattern is performed in normal reach, at least during the super reach fluctuation, special reach fluctuation, or During the normal reach fluctuation, a pattern of a specific rank or higher is selected by the advance notice production. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the expectation of a big hit from becoming low in the subsequent notice production after the super reach fluctuation is performed at least for the reach type according to a specific rank and the expectation of a big hit is shown to be high, and the player is interested. It can be prevented from being distracted.

In the first embodiment, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is a value from "0" to the first predetermined number, which is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of a big hit, and the value of the second predetermined number from the next value. However, the expectation of a big hit is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value "99" of the advance notice production counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" with the lowest expectation of a big hit. When selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, as a pointer that gives an upper limit value of judgment for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. , The judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b in order from the rank with the highest expected value to be a big hit, and the value of the notice effect counter 223d. If is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and the value of the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is set to the second pointer 223f, and the advance notice effect counter 223d is set. When the value is larger than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b and the judgment upper limit pointer 222b of the judged rank matches the second pointer 223f, the rank lower than that is not judged and corresponds to the rank at that time. The pattern to be used was decided as the pattern for the advance notice production. On the other hand, as for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d, the value of the first predetermined number from "99" is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of becoming a jackpot, and the value of the second predetermined number from the next value is the jackpot. The expectation level is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value "0" of the advance notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" having the lowest expectation degree to be a big hit. When selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect based on the value, the lower limit of the determination is used as a pointer that gives the lower limit value of the determination for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. A value pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or greater than the judgment lower limit value pointer in order from the rank with the highest expected value that becomes a big hit, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is the judgment lower limit value pointer. If it is the above, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, the value of the judgment lower limit value pointer is set to the second pointer 223f, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is from the judgment lower limit value pointer. If it is small and the judgment lower limit pointer of the judged rank matches the second pointer 223f, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect without judging the rank lower than that. You may. This also has the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is a value of the first predetermined number from "0", which is assigned to the rank with the highest expectation of a big hit, and the value of the second predetermined number from the next value. However, the expectation of a big hit is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value "99" of the advance notice production counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" with the lowest expectation of a big hit. When selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect based on the value of the counter 223d, as a pointer that gives an upper limit value of judgment for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. , Judgment upper limit value pointer 222b is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the determination upper limit value pointer 222b in order from the rank with the highest expected value to be a big hit, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d. If is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and the value of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b is set in the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, and then. The case where the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated in the range from 0 to the value of the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h has been described. Instead of this, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank having the highest expectation that the first predetermined number is from "99", and the value of the second predetermined number is assigned from the next value. The jackpot expectation is assigned to the second highest rank, and the value "0" of the notice effect counter 223d is assigned to the rank "1" with the lowest expectation to be a jackpot, and such a notice effect counter 223d When selecting one pattern from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect based on the value of, the determination is made as a pointer that gives the lower limit value of the determination for the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d for each pattern. A lower limit value pointer is prepared, and it is determined whether or not the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or higher than the judgment lower limit value pointer in order from the rank with the highest expected value that becomes a big hit, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is the determination lower limit value. If it is equal to or higher than the pointer, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, the value of the judgment lower limit value pointer is set in the minimum value of the advance notice effect counter, and then the advance notice effect counter 223d is set to the advance notice effect. The value of the counter minimum value memory may be updated in the range of 99. This also has the same effect as that of the second embodiment.

In the first embodiment, when the second pointer 223f is provided and one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the notice effect, the notice effect is given in order from the rank with the highest expected value to be a big hit. If the value of the counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and the value of the judgment upper limit pointer 222b is set to the second pointer 223f to give a notice. When the value of the effect counter 223d is larger than the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b and the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the judged rank matches the second pointer 223f, the judgment of the rank lower than that is not performed and the time point The pattern corresponding to the rank of is decided as the pattern of the advance notice production. On the other hand, when the judgment rank memory is provided and one pattern is selected from the five patterns prepared for the advance notice effect, the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is in order from the rank with the highest expected value that becomes a big hit. If is not more than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, the rank at that time is set in the judgment rank memory, and the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is the upper limit value of judgment. If the determined rank is larger than the pointer 222b and the determined rank matches the rank stored in the determined rank memory, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time is used as the advance notice effect pattern without determining the rank lower than that. May be determined as. Further, instead of the second pointer 223f and the judgment rank memory, separate flags are provided corresponding to the judgment upper limit pointer 222b corresponding to each rank, and each flag is normally set to off for the advance notice effect. When selecting one pattern from the five prepared patterns, in order from the rank with the highest expected value that becomes a big hit, if the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is equal to or less than the judgment upper limit pointer 222b, the rank at that time is used. The corresponding pattern is determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect, and the flag corresponding to the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b of the rank is set to on, and the determination is made when the value of the advance notice effect counter 223d is larger than the judgment upper limit value pointer 222b. When the flag corresponding to the rank determination upper limit pointer 222b is on, the pattern corresponding to the rank at that time may be determined as the pattern of the advance notice effect without determining the rank lower than that. These also have the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

In the fourth embodiment, when a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the expected degree of jackpot are performed in one variable effect, only when the expected degree of big hit in a certain advance notice effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank, after that. As the pattern of the advance notice effect, by deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect, one variable effect is being produced. In the plurality of advance notice productions performed in the above, the first embodiment is configured to prevent the expectation level of the jackpot from becoming lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation level of the predetermined rank or higher is shown as the expectation level of the jackpot. That is, when the second pointer 223f is provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the pattern of the advance notice effect, the advance notice effect is determined in the same variable effect. It was applied to the configuration in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern is not selected, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the expected degree of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, only when the expected degree of a big hit in a certain advance notice effect is equal to or higher than a predetermined rank, as a pattern of the subsequent advance notice effect. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice production in the same fluctuation production, a plurality of patterns performed during one fluctuation production The configuration of the second embodiment, that is, a configuration for preventing the expectation level of the jackpot from becoming lower than the predetermined rank after the expectation degree of the jackpot is indicated as the expectation degree of the predetermined rank or higher in the advance notice production. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the advance notice effect counter 223d is updated by the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. When determining the pattern of, the pattern with a rank lower than the expectation that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect is applied to the configuration that is not selected. The configuration of the third embodiment, that is, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the rank determination table 222c instead of the determination upper limit value pointer 222b, and the RAM 223 is provided with the determination rank counter 223e. When the judgment rank memory 223i is provided and the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined without providing the second pointer 223f and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h, the advance notice effect performed before in the same variable effect. Of course, it is also applicable to a configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in is not selected.

In the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of advance notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, only during the super reach change, as a certain notice effect pattern, before the super reach change. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation level that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in the advance notice production performed, the expectation indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation in the advance notice effect performed during the super reach fluctuation. The configuration of the first embodiment, that is, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the second pointer 223f to prevent the expectation of being a big hit from becoming lower than the degree, and the pattern of the advance notice effect is determined. In this case, it was applied to the configuration in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice production in the same variable production is not selected, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, in the case where a plurality of notice effects indicating the degree of expectation of a jackpot are performed in one variable effect, as a pattern of a certain advance notice effect only during the super reach change, the advance notice effect performed before the super reach change is performed. By deselecting a pattern with a rank lower than the expectation level that is the jackpot of the pattern determined in, in the advance notice effect performed during the super reach fluctuation, the jackpot is higher than the expectation level indicated by the reach type of the super reach fluctuation. In the configuration of the second embodiment, that is, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the advance notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h instead of the second pointer 223f, and the advance notice thereof is provided. When determining the pattern of the advance notice effect by changing the update range of the advance notice effect counter 223d by the maximum value memory 223h of the effect counter, the pattern determined in the previously performed advance notice effect in the same variable effect It is also possible to apply a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot to the non-selected configuration, and the determination upper limit is applied to the configuration of the third embodiment, that is, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. A rank determination table 222c is provided instead of the value pointer 222b, and a determination rank memory 223i is provided in the RAM 223 without providing the determination rank counter 223e, the second pointer 223f, and the notice effect counter maximum value memory 223h. In the case of determining the pattern of, even for a configuration in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of jackpot of the pattern determined in the previous advance notice effect in the same variable effect is not selected. Of course it is applicable.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed in a variation mode including the advance notice effect executed when the frame button 22 is operated and the advance notice effect automatically executed at a predetermined timing, each The case where the pattern (that is, the rank of the expected degree of jackpot shown in the notice effect) is determined separately for the advance notice effect has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the operation of the frame button 22 is not limited to this. When the variation effect is executed in a variation mode in which only the advance notice effect executed when there is, the variation effect is executed multiple times, or in the variation mode in which only the advance notice effect automatically executed at a predetermined timing is executed multiple times. Even when the effect is executed, a pattern (that is, a rank of the degree of expectation that is a big hit shown in the advance notice effect) may be determined separately for each advance notice effect.

In each of the above embodiments, when various advance notice effects are performed by comment display 151, child character appearance 152, super reach selection 153, character appearance 154, and cut-in 155 during the variable effect, the previous line is performed in each advance notice effect. We explained the configuration in which a pattern with a rank lower than the expected degree, which is a big hit of the pattern determined by the notice production, is not selected. On the other hand, in the step-up notice in which the degree of expectation increases each time the appearing image changes (steps up), the step-up change of the image is made when the frame button 22 is operated. When it is configured to determine whether or not, as in each of the above embodiments, when stepping up in each step, it is more than the expectation that the pattern determined in the previous step will be a big hit. A configuration may be applied in which a pattern having a lower rank is not selected. Further, each time the frame button 22 is instructed to be operated by the player, the effect of displaying the expected degree of big hit by the number of star symbols, the percentage, or the like is also produced in the same manner as in each of the above embodiments. In the above, a configuration may be applied in which a pattern having a rank lower than the expected degree of a jackpot of the pattern determined in the previously performed production is not selected. As a result, the same effect as that of each of the above embodiments can be achieved for the step-up notice and the effect of displaying the expected degree of big hit numerically each time the frame button 22 is instructed to operate by the player. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read the image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, in this case, the image data read from the character ROM 234 by the MPU 231 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 at the transfer destination.

In this case, the image controller 237 is accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, it is in use) to determine whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. A resident video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing the normal video RAM 236 (that is, it is in use) and a normal video RAM access flag (not shown). ) May be provided in the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may confirm the access flag corresponding to the buffer RAM of the transfer destination.

Alternatively, the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or the signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231 and resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts to access the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, or when the access is terminated, the image controller 237 notifies the MPU 231 of the information at any time, so that the MPU 231 can perform the access. Based on the notification, it may be determined whether or not the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that each of the video RAMs 235 and 236 is unused. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the image controller 237 is in use by checking only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 of the image controller 237.

Further, in this case, when the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233f has transfer data information other than Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233g, the MPU 231 follows the transfer data information and character ROM 234. The process of reading the image data from the image data and transferring the image data to the normal video RAM 236 may be started. Here, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is specified for a predetermined address, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to a display data table or the like by transferring image data according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, the drawing of the sprite is drawn. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, which is necessary for the resident video RAM 235, can always be stored in the normal video RAM 236. Then, using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

The process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in the display main process or the loop of the main process executed by the MPU 231. As a result, in the MPU 231, the image data transfer process can be executed by utilizing the time when the important processes in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are processes that are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 is used for image data without affecting the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process. Transfer processing can be executed.

In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM by using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but is common to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system used, a different address area may be allocated to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address at that address. The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236. That is, when the MPU 231 specifies the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the area of the video RAM to the image controller 237, the address set in the common address system may be simply specified. The structure of the instruction that specifies it can be simplified. For example, the address set in the common address system is simply used as the information indicating the storage destination of the sprite data in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the character ROM 234 is used as an image. It may be provided by directly connecting to the controller 237. Further, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specifications of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specifications of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. May be good.

By providing this bridge circuit, the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the premise that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM is used as it is, and the NAND flash memo 234a is used. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even when the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or the bridge circuit, the character ROM 234 may be configured to be directly accessible from the MPU 231.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memo 234a has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk may be used. It may be configured. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a slow read speed, but by adopting the display control device 114 having the configuration described in each of the above embodiments, the image can be displayed without any problem at the time to be displayed. Can be made to.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the NOR type ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program first executed after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 is stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. A first program storage area is provided in a memory composed of a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 is used to release the system reset in that area. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first. For example, instead of the NOR type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetoresistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM), or the like is provided in the character ROM 234, a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234, and after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. It may store a part of the boot program that is executed first.

In each of the above embodiments, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the buffer RAM 234c. After setting, the case where the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is turned on from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then sets the boot program in the buffer RAM 234c. When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is specified as "0000H", the data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and the internal bus (bus line 240) is read. It may be output to MPU231 via 240). In this case, if the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" for the internal bus (bus line 240) after the system reset is released, is the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 already set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is in the process of being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address "0000H" is specified by the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address specified in the internal bus (bus line 240) specifies the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the ROM controller 234b detects that the control program is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the specified address may be read directly from the MPU 231 and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). As a result, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", so that the display main process can be started in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately. Further, in this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 634c may not be performed. Thereby, the power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is connected to the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the internal bus (the internal bus to which the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected) ( It may be provided by directly connecting to the bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured so that the resident video RAM 235 can be directly connected. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and is larger. Video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and a resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a 1-port type (input / output port is 1 port) DRAM is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a multi-function is used. A port type RAM may be used. As a result, writing and reading to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. Therefore, for example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and the image is drawn while being read from the character ROM 234. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and one RAM is used as a resident area and a normal area. The same contents as those of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. When a resident area and a normal area are configured by one RAM, in order to prevent the input / output port of the memory from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process. , It is desirable to use a multi-port type RAM.

The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in each of the above embodiments is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Good. In this case, at least the image data corresponding to the image to be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is resident in response to the reception command received from the main control device 101 or the voice lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. It is preferable to make it resident in the video RAM 235.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident has been described, but all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. You may transfer it. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 does not exist, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawn image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. You may.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the resident video RAM 235 continues to be retained without being overwritten while the power is turned on is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main control means 101 or the voice lamp control device is used. Based on the command received from 113, the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is overwritten and updated based on a predetermined opportunity such as when the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is significantly different. May be good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Further, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is kept in the resident video RAM 235. You may leave it. Further, while the transition image is being displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read new image data to be resident, and the read image data is read from the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. It may be transferred while it is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). Image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information), and transferred to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is unused (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may try to do it.

When updating the resident video RAM 235, the image data corresponding to the transition image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transition image is transferred using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236. 3 It may be displayed on the symbol display device 81. Then, while the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. May be good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received the transfer instruction of the image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234, reads out the newly resident image data, and transfers the read image data via the buffer RAM 237a. You may do so. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In each of the above embodiments, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, the RAM determination value for determining whether the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal or not is stored when the power failure is resolved. In the display main process or main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after the power is turned on, the RAM determination value is confirmed before starting the transfer of the main image data at the time of power on from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 continues to be normally stored, so that the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. It may be configured as. In this case, by turning off the simple image display flag, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 may not be executed. As a result, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of a momentary power failure and execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data of the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If this is the case, it is possible to prevent the image data from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and it is possible to shorten the time required for recovery from a power failure. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is composed of the character ROM 234a having a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, by storing the RAM determination value in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, if the data of the resident video RAM 235 remains normally due to a momentary power failure or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, it is possible to immediately display a normal effect image on the auxiliary display unit 65 or the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can immediately start the game. The RAM determination value may be, for example, a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235. Further, instead of this RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided inside the image controller 237 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured independently and directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240). Further, when the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, the internal bus (bus line 240) where many data signals are exchanged. Transfers can be performed efficiently without being affected by.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is set to one block of the NAND flash memo 234a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the buffer is being scanned during the period (blank period) of scanning on the blank area which is the scanning area other than the display area where the actual image is displayed. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be such that the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be completed. As a result, the transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by utilizing the unused period of each video RAM 235, 236 that occurs during this blank period. ..

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred from another buffer RAM. It may be configured. Further, another area in which the image data is stored while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written in the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Since it can be processed, the time required for the processing can be shortened.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Although the case of transfer has been described, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. As a result, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, so that the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly and the processing can be simplified.

In each of the above embodiments, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. The case of transferring to 235b has been described, but since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 434 during the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image and the fluctuating image at power-on may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on and the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. .. Further, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and the main image at power-on and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. While the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by displaying the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image, the resident video RAM 235 When the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. As a result, the transfer of image data can be completed faster without going through the buffer RAM 237a.

In each of the above embodiments, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player when the variation effect is not being executed, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a rear image change command, and the display control device 114 displays the command. The case of changing the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the back image change command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state. A rear image change command or a game state command may be generated. As a result, the display control device 114 can change the rear image and the reach type of the super reach according to the game state based on the back image change command and the game state command. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and change the rear image or the reach type of the super reach according to the gaming state. Then, the rear image after the change or the image data corresponding to at least a part of the range of the rear image corresponding to the super reach of the reach type after the change is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the back image can be immediately displayed by using the image data resident in the back image area 235c.

Further, the display control device 114 may change the rear image according to the provisions of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the like. In this case, the image data corresponding to the changed back image may be configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data table. Here, when the image data of the back image is transferred by the transfer data table, the transfer data is stored so that the new back image is stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the table may be specified, or the data is transferred so that the new back image is stored in an area different from the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored. The transfer data information of the data table may be specified. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image selected and displayed by the player, it is not necessary to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again, so that the processing of the display control device 114 The increase in load can be suppressed.

In each of the above embodiments, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the voice lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The case where the display control device 114 immediately displays the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 is input to the main control device 110. A vibration error may be detected by the main control device 110, and an error command notifying the error may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to either the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. Then, when an error command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. You may.

On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor 228 may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may be configured to detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. Then, when a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and further, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 44). By executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 46B) when the above is determined, the warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this case, since it is not necessary to send and receive an error command from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, the warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 earlier.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the vibration sensor 228 is attached to the back surface of the game board 13 has been described, but instead of the vibration sensor 228 or together with the vibration sensor 228, the magnet sensor is mounted on the back surface of the game board 13. It may be attached to. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to suppress the flow of the ball being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the ball into the ball entry port. Therefore, the output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. Then, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main control device 110, if it is determined that the main control device 110 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is generated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the voice lamp control device 113, if it is determined by the voice lamp control device 113 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field is determined. An error command that conveys an error may be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. Then, in the error message image image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 313, image data corresponding to the error message image for notifying the magnetic field error by the display of the third symbol display device 218 is resident. When an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 313 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 310, if it is determined by the display control device 114 that a magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 313 May display the warning image on the third symbol display device 218 by turning on the error occurrence flag and setting the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on. As a result, when the display control device 114 receives an error command from the main control device 110 or the voice lamp control device 113, or grasps the occurrence of a magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the character ROM 234 is displayed. Even when the NAND flash memory 234a is used, the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 425 is used to generate an error message image for notifying a magnetic field error without delay. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the third symbol display device 81, so that the player behaves illegally. It can be deterred.

In each of the above embodiments, as an additional data table, the case where the drawing content for adding the notice effect to the third symbol display device 81 and displaying it is defined in the variable effect has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. The additional data table is used to draw various effects to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in addition to the one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. The drawing content of is specified. Further, in the additional data table, the drawing contents required to add and display an image that is not normally displayed for one effect displayed by the display data table selected based on the command from the main control device 110. In addition to prescribing, or in addition to prescribing such drawing content, the drawing content required to change the color tone of part or all of the one production, or the display in one production. The drawing contents required to change and display the image to be displayed may be defined.

When the drawing content required to change a part or all of the color tone in one effect is specified by the additional data table, one frame of the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the additional data table. Corresponding to an address expressed in units of time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment), the type of sprite that changes the color tone at that time and the color information that specifies the color tone after the change in the sprite are displayed. It may be specified. Then, the MPU 231 specifies the type of sprite that changes the color tone to the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing content specified in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. When the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is added. The drawing list may be created by replacing the color information specified by the data table. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

Further, when the drawing content required to change and display the image displayed in one effect is defined by the additional data table, in the additional data table, the image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 is used. Corresponds to the address represented by the time when is displayed (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new sprite type. It may specify the drawing information of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the MPU 231 sets the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the sprite type to be newly displayed at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional drawing contents defined in the additional data table set in the additional data table buffer 233e. When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Of these, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. As a result, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the transfer data table is prepared corresponding to each display data table has been described, but in addition, an additional transfer data table which is a transfer data table corresponding to each additional data table is prepared. You may. In this additional transfer data table, the sprite that is used in the corresponding additional data table corresponding to the address specified in the additional data table (or display data table) and should start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Transfer data information of image data may be described.

In this case, for example, in each of the above embodiments, when the work RAM 233 of the display control device 281 is provided with an additional transfer data table buffer and one additional data table is set in the additional data table buffer 233e, the display data table is displayed. In addition to the corresponding transfer data table, the additional transfer data table corresponding to the one additional data table may be set in the additional transfer data table buffer. Then, the MPU 231 adds the transfer data information to the drawing list if the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233g in the additional transfer data table set in the additional transfer data table buffer. It may be.

As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used by the additional data table to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the effect defined by the additional data table can be easily and surely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data table corresponding to the additional data table, it is possible to transfer the necessary image data to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing the drawing of the image based on the additional data table. Additional data tables allow you to specify the drawing of many sprites. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various kinds of effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the display control device 114 prepares the display data table for each variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the variation effect is described, for example. , "Fluctuation start", "High-speed fluctuation", "Notice production", "Normal reach fluctuation", "Super reach fluctuation", etc. A display data table is prepared for each element, and the fluctuation pattern shown in the display fluctuation pattern command is used. After identifying the elements required for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the paper required for the specified variation effect are put together into one, and the final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is created. It may be generated. "Fluctuating start-up", "high-speed fluctuation", "normal reach fluctuation", etc. are often displayed in common for each fluctuation pattern. Therefore, by elementizing the variation effect in this way and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

In each of the above embodiments, a case where the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table use a common pointer 233 g to specify the drawing content and the transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233 g has been described. A pointer may be prepared for each data table.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each image display interval (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) for one frame at which the drawing process is completed. As described above, the image controller 237 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. Since the driving of the third symbol display device 81 is performed so that the images for one frame are always displayed at equal time intervals (20 milliseconds intervals), the V interrupt signal is signaled for each display of the images for one frame. By sending, it is possible to keep the time interval accurate without timing.

In each of the above embodiments, the image controller 237 specifies a frame buffer in which the drawn image should be expanded based on the drawing target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image expanded first from the other frame buffer. The case where the information is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame in which the drawn image should be expanded each time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. The buffers may be selected alternately, and the previously expanded image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Further, each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image information is output to the frame buffer for expanding the drawn image and the third symbol display device 81. It may be replaced with the frame buffer to be used.

In each of the above embodiments, after the final display data table corresponding to the final display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device 110 is set via the voice lamp control device 113 until the final display effect is completed. When neither the variation pattern command (variation pattern command for display) nor the demo command (demo command for display) is received, the display data table for demo corresponding to the demo production is set in the display data table buffer 233d. However, the confirmation display data table corresponding to the confirmation display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. Further, in this case, the final display effect is displayed until one of the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) and the demo command (display demo command) is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. The final display data table corresponding to the final display effect may be reset to the display data table buffer 233d each time the command is completed. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can continue to display the final display effect until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the demonstration effect changes the rear image and stops and displays the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described. The present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, in the display control means 314, after the power is turned on, the image data corresponding to the main image at power on and the variable image at power on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power on and the power supply of the resident video RAM 235. Transferred to the variable image area 235b at the time of turning on, and after the transfer is completed, the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and then the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The case has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the display control means 314, only the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, and when the power is turned on after the transfer is completed. After displaying the main image on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. As a result, the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be used for operation checks at players, hall personnel, factories, etc. at the time of manufacturing. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

Further, in this case, the MPU 231 may monitor the completion of transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b. As a result, if the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple fluctuation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image stored in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. It is desirable that the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image at power-on is transferred to the fluctuating image area 235b at power-on immediately after the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to speed up the variation display by the variation image when the power is turned on.

In each of the above embodiments, the display data table, the additional data table, and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the contents (drawing contents) of the image to be drawn at that time and the contents thereof. Although the case of specifying the information of the image data to be transferred in time (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be specified at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set according to the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since one frame of image is displayed every second, the display data table may specify the display contents at intervals of 1/30 second.

Further, in the display data table and the additional data table, as the sprite type to be drawn specified at a predetermined time interval, the sprite type itself is not specified, but the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. It may specify the address of the character ROM 234. In the display control device 114, since the image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234, the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the sprite type is stored in association with each sprite type. Manages the address of. Therefore, if the address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored is specified as the display content specified for each predetermined time interval in the display data table, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the character and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

In each of the above embodiments, the stored image discrimination flag 233j is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. Although the case has been described, instead of this, the work RAM 233 may store information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer the image data of the predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and refers to the predetermined image data. Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if it is not stored, an instruction for transferring image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. Further, when the transfer instruction of the image data of a predetermined sprite type is set, the MPU 231 stores the information indicating the sprite type in which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233, and also stores the image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub-area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

In each of the above embodiments, when the image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image discrimination flag 233j. The case where the MPU 231 performs a process of non-execution of the transfer process if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 after determining whether or not the data is transferred has been described. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image discrimination flag 233j is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored for each sprite. You may let me. Further, the work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer the image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 will be transferred to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where only the image data corresponding to the “back surface A” among the plurality of back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Image data corresponding to two or more rear images may be made resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the rear image used in some super reach may be resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, by resident the back image of the super reach, which is expected to appear frequently or frequently, in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed. It is possible to suppress the number of times.

In each of the above embodiments, the transfer data table defines a transfer command for image data in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233 g, and the MPU 231 is instructed by the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. The case where the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and it is necessary in the display data table at the beginning of the display data table. The MPU 231 controls the image controller 237 to transfer the necessary image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 based on the information described at the top of the display data table. You may. Alternatively, based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and normally outputs the image data of the image type from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled so as to transfer the data to the video RAM 236.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the color tone of a part of the image changes with time in the back surface C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, has been described, but the color tone of the entire image changes with time. May be good. Further, as the rear image, not only the one that scrolls or the color tone changes with the passage of time, but also an object (for example, a person) that appears with the passage of time instead of such a rear image. It may be something that moves or changes.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are displayed at high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them has been described, but instead of displaying the high speed variation. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where one first entry slot 64 for starting the jackpot lottery when the ball enters is arranged in the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Rather, a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances may be arranged on the game board 13 in which the entry is detected independently and the lottery for the jackpot is started. In this case, the hold ball number command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when there is a hold at each first ball entry port indicates which first ball entry port is the hold. Information may be included. Further, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation is started includes information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by the first ball entry port. Good. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a hold ball number counter is prepared for each first ball entry port, and when a hold ball number command is received, the first ball entry indicated in the hold ball number command is received. When the number of reserved balls is set in the hold ball counter for the mouth and a fluctuation pattern command is received, if the hold ball counter for the first entry port indicated in the fluctuation pattern command is decremented by 1, the first entry port The number of reserved balls can be counted for each.

In each of the above embodiments, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the hold ball counter 223a is reduced by 1 (see S2107 in FIG. 33). , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the variation processing (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the number of reserved balls of the main control device 110 is subtracted according to the variation pattern command set by the variation start processing (S1207). A hold ball number command is set so that the value (N) of the counter 203a is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 (see S1205 in FIG. 23), and the hold ball number command has a variation pattern. It may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the command. In this case, S2107 in FIG. 33 is omitted. When the value (N) of the subtracted number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 is transmitted, the information indicating that the number of reserved balls is the number of reserved balls after the subtraction (that is, the start winning prize) is sent to the reserved ball number command. The hold ball number command may be generated without including the values of various counters acquired with the start winning, including information indicating that the number of reserved balls is not added in accordance with the above.

In each of the above embodiments, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. When the voice lamp control device and the display control device are configured as one control device, the notice effect is replaced with the command generated by the voice lamp control device 113 and notified to the display control device 114 such as the advance notice effect command and the error occurrence command. Generates various flags such as execution flag and error occurrence flag, and sets the display data table, transfer data table, and additional data table in the display data table buffer 233d, transfer data table buffer 233f, and additional data table buffer 233e based on the flags. You may generate various image data such as a warning image, or set a transfer instruction for necessary image data.

In each of the above embodiments, the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the passage of the second ball opening 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls in the variable display based on the winning of the first ball opening 64 is set by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is divided by the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the light emitting member notifies the number of reserved balls. It may be configured as.

Further, as shown in each of the above embodiments, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled vertically on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a vertical direction or an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, and for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only a ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

An acquisition means for acquiring random information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a selection means for selecting a first effect mode in which identification information is dynamically displayed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. And a secondary having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. In a gaming machine provided with a control means and imparting a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, the sub While executing the first effect by the first effect executing means, the control means executes a second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect a plurality of times. The second effect executing means and the selection means for selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect executing means for each second effect are provided, and the selection means is one. When selecting the degree of expectation shown in the second effect for the second effect, the expectation shown in the second effect performed during the same first effect prior to the second effect. A game machine A1 characterized in that an expectation degree lower than a degree is not selected.

According to the game machine A1, in the main control means, the first aspect of the effect, which is the dynamic display of the identification information, is based on the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Be selected. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect executing means as the first effect in the selected mode. When the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, the player is given a predetermined game value. Further, in the sub-control means, while the first effect by the first effect execution means is being executed, the second effect indicating the degree of expectation that a predetermined identification information appears in the first effect is the second effect execution. Executed multiple times by means. Here, the degree of expectation shown in the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is selected for each second effect by the selection means. Then, in this selection means, when the expectation degree shown in the second effect is selected for the first second effect, it is executed during the same first effect before the second effect. Expectations lower than the expectations shown in the second production are not selected. As a result, after a predetermined expectation is shown in a certain second production during the first first production, the expectation is the same as or higher than the predetermined expectation in the subsequent second production. Can indicate the degree. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed in the first first effect, it is possible to prevent the expectation from becoming low after the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears is high. There is an effect that it is possible to determine the degree of expectation to be hit in each of the second production units executed during the first first production, while suppressing the player from being distracted.

The game machine A1 is provided with an operating means operated by a player, and the second effect executing means is used as a third effect for one or more of the plurality of second effects. The operation means is executed when the player operates the operation means, and the selection means determines the degree of expectation indicated by the third effect for the third effect, respectively. A game machine A2 characterized in that it is selected when it is operated by a person.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the following effects are played. That is, with respect to the third effect executed by the second effect executing means when the operating means is operated by the player, the degree of expectation indicated by the third effect is determined by the player. It is selected by the selection means when it is operated. Even in the case of such a configuration, after a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second effect (including the third effect) during the first first effect, the second effect thereafter. (Including the third effect) can show the same or higher expectation as the predetermined expectation. As a result, the player can be made to positively operate the operation means while expecting that the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear will increase. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be motivated to participate in the game.

In the game machine A2, the second effect executing means executes a fourth effect other than the third effect among the plurality of second effects at a predetermined timing. The selection means expects the third effect when the third effect is executed by the second effect executing means before the fourth effect in the fourth effect. A game machine A3, characterized in that, after selecting a degree, the expected degree indicated by the fourth effect is selected with respect to the first fourth effect.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the following effects are played. That is, among the plurality of second effects, the fourth effect other than the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player is executed by the second effect execution means at a predetermined timing. Then, in the fourth effect, when the third effect is executed by the second effect execution means before the fourth effect, the degree of expectation is selected for the third effect. Later, with respect to the first fourth effect, the degree of expectation indicated by the fourth effect is selected by the selection means. As a result, even in the case where the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player is executed before the fourth effect, a predetermined degree of expectation is obtained in the third effect. After being selected, in the subsequent fourth effect, it is possible to easily and surely deselect an expectation level lower than the predetermined expectation level selected in the third effect. Therefore, during the first first effect, a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player, and then the predetermined expectation is shown in the fourth effect thereafter. There is an effect that the same degree of expectation or a higher degree of expectation can be easily and surely selected and shown.

In the game machine A3, the selection means expects the fourth effect to show when the second effect executing means executes the fourth effect at a predetermined timing for the fourth effect. A game machine A4 characterized by selecting a degree.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A3, the following effects are played. That is, when the fourth effect is executed by the second effect executing means at a predetermined timing for the first fourth effect, the degree of expectation indicated by the fourth effect is selected by the selection means. As a result, even if the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operating means by the player is executed before the fourth effect, when is the expectation level for the third effect? After the predetermined degree of expectation is selected in the third production, it is easier and more reliable to select in the third production in the subsequent fourth production without knowing whether or not is selected. Expectations lower than the predetermined expected degree can be deselected. Therefore, during the first first effect, a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in the third effect executed at the operation timing of the operation means by the player, and then the predetermined expectation is shown in the fourth effect thereafter. There is an effect that the same degree of expectation or a higher degree of expectation can be selected and shown more easily and surely.

In any of the game machines A1 to A4, the selection means sets the degree of expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing means in the order in which the second effect is executed. A game machine A5 characterized in that it is selected for each of the two effects.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the game machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, the degree of expectation indicated by the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing means is selected for each second effect in the order in which the second effect is executed by the selection means. As a result, when selecting the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect for the first second effect, the second effect executed during the same first effect prior to the second effect. There is an effect that the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree shown in the production can be easily deselected.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the plurality of second effects indicate the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear in a plurality of ranks, respectively, and the selection means is a predetermined time. When the counter that is updated within a predetermined range and the predetermined range in which the counter is updated are divided in association with the ranks of a plurality of expectations indicated by the second effect, the boundary value is set for each rank. Based on the boundary value defining means to be specified, the boundary value specified by the boundary value defining means associated with the rank in descending order of expectation, and the value of the counter, the first second. If it is determined by the judgment means for determining whether or not to select the rank as the expectation degree indicated by the production and the predetermined rank is selected as the expectation degree indicated by the first and second productions, the judgment means. By the rank information storage control means for storing information about a predetermined rank in the rank information storage means and the determination means, the boundary value is associated with the rank in order from the highest expectation and is defined by the boundary value defining means. In the process of determining whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect based on the value of the counter and the value of the counter, the rank to be determined is a predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means. If this is the case, the gaming machine B1 is provided with a discontinuing means for discontinuing the determination by the determination means and selecting a predetermined rank as the degree of expectation indicated by the first and second effects.

According to the game machine B1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, when the selection means is divided into a counter that is updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals and a predetermined range in which the counter is updated in association with the ranks of a plurality of expectations indicated by the second effect. , A boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank is provided. Then, in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is based on the boundary value associated with the rank and defined by the boundary value defining means and the value of the counter. , Whether or not to select the rank is determined by the judgment means, and when it is determined by the judgment means that the predetermined rank is selected as the expectation degree indicated by the first and second effects, the information regarding the predetermined rank is ranked. It is stored in the rank information storage means by the information storage control means. On the other hand, the first and second effects are shown based on the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means associated with the rank in order from the rank with the highest expectation by the determination means and the value of the counter. In the process of determining whether or not to select the rank as the degree of expectation, if the rank to be determined is a predetermined rank stored in the rank storage means, the determination by the determination means is terminated by the discontinuation means. A predetermined rank is selected as the degree of expectation indicated by the first and second effects. As a result, when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, a rank lower than that rank is not selected for the second effect that is subsequently executed within the same first effect. Can be. Further, this non-selection can be realized by using the same boundary value without changing the boundary value used in the determination means. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large number of boundary values, it is the same when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while suppressing the capacity required to store the boundary values. There is an effect that a rank lower than the rank can be deselected for the second effect to be executed after that in the first effect.

In the game machine B1, the rank information storage control means relates to the rank having the lowest expectation that the predetermined identification information appears when the first effect is started by the first effect executing means. A game machine B2 characterized in that information is stored in the rank information storage means.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the rank information storage means receives information about the rank having the lowest expectation that predetermined identification information appears. Memorized by means. As a result, there is an effect that the expectation level selected for the second effect, which is executed first after the first effect is started, can be selected including the expectation level of the lowest rank. ..

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the plurality of second effects indicate the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear at a plurality of ranks, and the selection means includes a counter. , The counter is associated with the updating means for updating the counter within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals and the ranks of the plurality of expectations indicated by the second effect, and the counters are arranged in descending order of the degree of expectation in the rank. When the predetermined range to be updated is divided, the boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank and the boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value in order from the rank with the highest expectation are associated with the rank. Based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, the judgment means for determining whether or not to select the rank as the expectation degree indicated by the first second effect, and the first second by the judgment means. When it is determined that a predetermined rank is selected as the expected degree indicated by the effect, the boundary value storage control that stores the information on the boundary value associated with the predetermined rank and defined by the boundary value defining means in the boundary value storage means. The updating means includes means, and the updating means excludes a range associated with a rank having a lower expectation than the predetermined rank based on the boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage means. The gaming machine C1 characterized in that the counter is updated within a predetermined range.

According to the game machine C1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, the selection means includes a counter, an update means for updating the counter within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, and an expectation degree in the rank in association with a plurality of expectation degree ranks indicated by the second effect. There is provided a boundary value defining means for defining the boundary value for each rank when the predetermined range in which the counter is updated is divided in the order of high or low. Then, in order from the rank with the highest degree of expectation, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is based on the boundary value associated with the rank and defined by the boundary value defining means and the value of the counter. Whether or not to select the rank is determined by the determination means, and when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined rank is selected as the expectation degree indicated by the first and second effects, it is associated with the predetermined rank. Information about the boundary value defined by the boundary value defining means is stored in the boundary value storage means by the boundary value storage control means. Then, based on the boundary value corresponding to the predetermined rank stored in the boundary value storage means, the counter is within the predetermined range excluding the range associated with the rank having a lower expectation than the predetermined rank by the update means. It will be updated with. Since the update range of the counter is changed in this way, a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while using the same boundary value without changing the boundary value used in the judgment means. Each time, in the second effect that is subsequently executed in the same first effect, a rank lower than that rank can be deselected. Therefore, since it is not necessary to store a large number of boundary values, it is the same when a certain rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect while suppressing the capacity required to store the boundary values. There is an effect that a rank lower than the rank can be deselected for the second effect to be executed after that in the first effect.

In the game machine C1, the boundary value storage control means has the lowest expectation that the predetermined identification information appears when the first effect is started by the first effect executing means. A gaming machine C2 characterized in that information about a boundary value associated with the boundary value defining means is stored in the boundary value storage means.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the boundary value storage control means associates the predetermined identification information with the rank having the lowest expectation that the predetermined identification information appears, and the boundary value. Information about the boundary value defined by the defining means is stored in the boundary value storage means. As a result, the counter can be updated over a predetermined range from the start of the first effect to at least the selection of the expectation level indicated by the second effect for the first second effect. .. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation degree selected for the second effect to be executed first after the first effect is started can be selected including the expectation degree of the lowest rank.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the selection means includes a counter updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, a plurality of expected ranks that can be indicated by the second effect, and a value of the counter. A storage means for storing information indicating a relationship, a determination means for determining the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the first second effect from the value of the counter based on the information stored in the storage means, and a determination means thereof. The storage means includes a rank storage control means for storing information about the rank determined by the above in the rank storage means, and the storage means has a higher expectation than a predetermined rank among the ranks of the expectation that the second effect can show. The first storage means for storing information indicating the relationship with the value of the counter for ranks other than the lower rank is included, and the determination means stores information on the predetermined rank in the rank storage means. In the case, the gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is determined from the value of the counter based on the information stored in the first storage means.

According to the game machine D1, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are played. That is, the selection means stores a counter that is updated within a predetermined range at predetermined time intervals, and a storage means that stores information indicating the relationship between the ranks of a plurality of expectations that the second effect can show and the value of the counter. And are provided. Then, based on the information stored in the storage means, the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect is determined by the determination means from the value of the counter. Then, the information regarding the rank determined by the determination means is stored in the rank storage means by the rank storage control means. Here, the storage means stores information indicating the relationship with the value of the counter with respect to the ranks other than the ranks having a lower expectation than the predetermined rank among the ranks of the expectation that the second effect can show. When the first storage means is included and the information about the predetermined rank is stored in the rank storage means, the second one from the value of the counter is based on the information stored in the first storage means. The rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the production is determined by the determining means. As a result, when a predetermined rank is determined as the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect, a rank lower than the predetermined rank is non-determined in the second effect to be executed thereafter in the same first effect. It has the effect of being a choice. Further, by providing the first storage means, it is possible to finely set the probability of being selected for each rank having an expectation degree higher than the predetermined rank while deselecting a rank having an expectation degree lower than the predetermined rank. effective.

In the game machine D1, the storage means includes a second storage means for storing information indicating the relationship with the value of the counter with respect to the ranks of all the expectations that the second effect can show, and the ranks. The memory control means uses the rank information storage means to use the information regarding the rank with the lowest expectation that the predetermined identification information appears when the first effect is started by the first effect execution unit. When the information regarding the rank having the lowest expectation is stored in the rank storage means, the determination means uses the value of the counter based on the information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine D2, which is characterized by determining the rank of the degree of expectation indicated by the first and second effects.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the following effects are played. That is, the storage means includes a second storage means for storing information indicating the relationship with the counter value for all the ranks of the degree of expectation that the second effect can show. Further, when the first effect is started by the first effect execution means, the information regarding the rank having the lowest expectation that the predetermined identification information appears is the rank information storage means by the rank information storage control means. Is remembered in. Then, when the rank storage means stores information on the rank having the lowest expectation, the expectation indicated by the second effect of one from the counter value is based on the information stored in the second storage means. The rank of is determined by the determining means. As a result, there is an effect that the expectation level selected for the second effect, which is executed first after the first effect is started, can be selected including the expectation level of the lowest rank. ..

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, and D2, the game machine is an operation means operated by the player and an operation reception means for receiving the operation of the operation means by the player. The second effect executing means receives the operation of the operation means by the operation receiving means during a predetermined period for at least one second effect of the plurality of second effects. In addition, it is repeatedly executed as the fifth effect, and the selection means selects the degree of expectation indicated by the fifth effect for each fifth effect, and the fifth effect is the fifth effect. When selecting the expectation level shown in the fifth effect, the expectation level lower than the expectation level shown in the fifth effect executed during the predetermined period before the fifth effect is not selected. A game machine E1 characterized by.

According to the game machine E1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1 and D2, the following effects are obtained. That is, with respect to at least one second effect among the plurality of second effects executed by the second effect executing means, every time the operation of the operation means is received by the operation receiving means during a predetermined period, the fifth effect is performed. It is repeatedly executed as a production. The degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect is selected by the selection means for each fifth effect. Further, when the degree of expectation shown in the fifth effect is selected for one fifth effect, the expectation shown in the fifth effect executed during a predetermined period prior to the fifth effect. Expectations lower than the degree are deselected, and are deselected by the selection means. As a result, when the operating means is operated during the predetermined period and the fifth effect is repeatedly executed, the degree of expectation shown in the first fifth effect is increased in the fifth effect executed before that. It has the effect of suppressing the expectation that is lower than the indicated expectation. In addition, this makes it possible to make the player expect that the degree of expectation shown by the fifth effect will increase, and to repeatedly operate the operation means, so that the player can play the game. It has the effect of improving the willingness to participate.

An acquisition means for acquiring random information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a selection means for selecting a first effect mode in which identification information is dynamically displayed based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. And a secondary having a first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the mode of the first effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. In a game machine provided with control means and imparting a predetermined game value to a player when a predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, the player The operation means operated by the operation means and the sub-control means each time the operation of the operation means is received by the operation reception means during a predetermined period during the execution of the first effect by the first effect execution means. The second effect executing means that repeatedly executes the second effect indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect, and the second effect executed by the second effect executing means. The second effect includes a selection means for selecting the expectation level indicated by the effect each time the second effect is executed, and the selection means selects the expectation level indicated by the second effect. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree shown in the second effect performed during the predetermined period is not selected prior to the effect of.

According to the game machine E2, in the main control means, the first aspect of the effect, which is the dynamic display of the identification information, is based on the selection means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied. Be selected. Then, in the sub-control means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed by the first effect executing means as the first effect in the selected mode. When the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect executed by the first effect executing means, the player is given a predetermined game value. Further, in the sub-control means, every time the operation of the operation means is received by the operation receiving means during the predetermined period during the execution of the first effect by the first effect executing means, the predetermined identification information is generated in the first effect. The second effect indicating the degree of expectation that appears is repeatedly executed by the second effect execution means. Here, the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect executed by the second effect executing means is selected by the selection means each time each second effect is executed. Then, in this selection means, when selecting the expectation degree shown in the second effect for the first second effect, the second effect executed during the predetermined period prior to the second effect. Expectations lower than the expectations shown in the production are not selected. As a result, after a predetermined expectation is shown in a certain second production during the first first production, the expectation is the same as or higher than the predetermined expectation in the subsequent second production. Can indicate the degree. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed in the first first effect, it is possible to prevent the expectation from becoming low after the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears is high. This has the effect of preventing the player from being distracted by the player, and determining the degree of expectation that will be won in each of the second production units that are repeatedly executed during the first first production. In addition, this makes it possible to make the player expect that the degree of expectation shown by the second effect will increase, and to repeatedly operate the operation means, so that the player can play the game. It has the effect of improving the willingness to participate.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, and E2, the operation means operated by the player is provided, and the first effect is provided with the predetermined identification information. It is configured to have a first period suggesting that it will appear, and the second effect is a sixth effect performed in accordance with the first period and by a player during the first period. The selection means includes a seventh effect performed when the operation of the operation means is performed, and the selection means is of a specific rank by the selection means in the second effect executed before the first period. When the expectation degree is selected, the specific rank is selected as the expectation degree shown in the sixth effect, and the sub-control means is the second execution executed before the first period. A game machine F1 characterized in that when a specific rank of expectation is selected by the selection means in the production, the seventh production is not executed.

According to the game machine F1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, and E2, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the expectation of a specific rank is selected by the selection means in the second effect executed before the first period suggesting that the predetermined identification information appears in the first effect. , A specific rank is selected by the selection means as the degree of expectation shown in the sixth effect, which is the second effect executed in accordance with the first period. Further, in this case, even if the player operates the operating means during the first period, the seventh effect to be executed by the operation is not executed. As a result, if the expectation of a specific rank is indicated by the second production as the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears at an early stage before the first period, the identification is performed during the first period. The player can concentrate on the sixth effect, which indicates the degree of expectation of the rank. Therefore, there is an effect that the expectation that a predetermined game value is given to the player can be further increased.

In the game machine F1, the second effect includes an eighth effect that is automatically executed during the first period, and the selection means is performed in the second effect that is executed before the first period. When a specific rank of expectation is selected by the selection means, a rank having a lower expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected as the expectation shown in the eighth effect. A game machine F2 characterized by this.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine F1, the following effects are played. That is, when the expectation degree of a specific rank is selected by the selection means in the second effect executed before the first period, the expectation shown in the eighth effect automatically executed during the first period. As a degree, a rank having a lower expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is deselected by the selection means. As a result, in the eighth effect, the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information is not shown lower than the specific rank, and the expected degree is maintained or shown higher. Therefore, during the first period, it is possible to show the player how the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined identification information is raised by this eighth effect, so that the player's interest can be further enhanced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1, F2, the selection means has an expectation level higher than a predetermined expectation level in the first second production. When is selected, the degree of expectation shown in the second effect is selected for the second effect executed after the first second effect, which is shown in the first second effect. A game machine F3 characterized in that an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree is not selected.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 and F2, the following effects are obtained. That is, when an expectation degree equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation degree is selected in the first second effect, the expectation shown in the second effect with respect to the second effect executed after the first second effect. When selecting the degree, the expectation degree lower than the expectation degree shown in the first second effect is deselected. As a result, in the second effect, which is executed a plurality of times during the first effect, when an expectation degree equal to or higher than the predetermined expectation degree is shown as the expectation degree at which the predetermined identification information appears, the second effect is performed thereafter. It is possible to prevent the degree of expectation shown in the effect of 2 from becoming lower than the predetermined degree of expectation. Therefore, after an expectation level equal to or higher than a predetermined expectation level is shown in one of the second effects of the second effect performed a plurality of times during the first effect, a predetermined expectation is made in another second effect. By showing the degree of expectation lower than the degree, there is an effect that the loss of interest of the player can be suppressed.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, the first effect suggests that the predetermined identification information appears. The selection means is configured to have a first period of time, and the selection means at least selects the degree of expectation indicated by the second effect with respect to the first second effect performed during the first period. The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that an expectation degree lower than the expectation degree shown in the second effect performed prior to the second effect during the first period is deselected.

According to the game machine G1, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3, the following effects are obtained. The first effect is configured to have a first period suggesting that the predetermined identification information appears, and the first effect is relative to one second effect performed during the first period. When selecting the expectation level shown in the second effect, the selection means is at least an expectation level lower than the expectation level shown in the second effect executed before the second effect during the first period. Is deselected by. As a result, when the first period is reached in the first production, at least during the first period, a predetermined degree of expectation is shown in a certain second production, and then in the subsequent second production. , It is possible to show the same or higher expectation as the predetermined expectation. Therefore, in the plurality of second effects performed during the first period suggesting that the predetermined identification information appears, the expectation is high after the expectation that the predetermined identification information appears is high. Since it is possible to prevent the degree from becoming low, the effect is that the player can be prevented from being distracted, and the expected degree to be hit can be determined for each second production unit executed during the first first production. There is.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, the first effect suggests that the predetermined identification information appears. The second effect includes a sixth effect executed in accordance with the first period and an operation of the operation means by the player during the first period. In the sixth effect, if a specific rank of expectation is selected by the selection means, the selection means includes the seventh effect to be executed in the case of the above. As the degree of expectation to be shown, the gaming machine G2 is characterized in that a rank having a lower degree of expectation than the rank selected in the sixth effect is not selected.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, and F1 to F3, the following effects are obtained. That is, the first effect is configured to have a first period suggesting that the predetermined identification information appears, and is a second effect executed in accordance with the first period. In the sixth effect, when the expected degree of a specific rank is selected by the selection means, the seventh effect, which is the second effect executed when the player operates the operation means during the first period. As the expectation degree shown in the production, a rank having a lower expectation degree than the rank selected in the sixth production is not selected by the selection means. As a result, when the sixth effect indicating the degree of expectation of a specific rank is executed in accordance with the first period, the seventh effect executed when the operating means is operated by the player is always performed. Expectations above a certain rank are shown. Therefore, during the first period, the degree of expectation shown in the second production (sixth production and seventh production) can be secured at a minimum to a specific rank, and after that, by operating the operating means, the first There is an effect that the player can be expected to have a higher degree of expectation in the production of 7.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1 and G2, the game machine H1 is a slot machine. .. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1 and G2, the game machine is a pachinko game machine. H2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2, E1, E2, F1 to F3, G1 and G2, the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. A game machine H3 characterized by being. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In recent years, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a variable effect (dynamic display of identification information) is displayed on a display means such as a liquid crystal display device to improve the interest of the game. The variable effect is an effect that is started when a ball enters the ball entry port (starting opening) (starting prize). For example, three horizontal or vertical scrolls in the effective display area, or 3 × 3 squares. A total of 9 symbols, etc. are displayed, the symbols, etc. displayed based on the predetermined game conditions are scrolled, and when the scrolling is stopped, the stop symbols are predetermined at the predetermined stop positions. It causes a hit when there is.
In addition, there is a gaming machine that not only displays the variable effect on the display means but also executes an effect that shows the player the expected degree of winning during the variable effect. In many such game machines, an effect of showing the player the expected degree of winning is executed a plurality of times during one variable effect. As a result, even if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is performed, the player can expect to win without getting bored by executing the effect of showing the player the expected degree of hit during the variation effect multiple times. You can play the game while enhancing the feeling. (For example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-312981)
In a conventional game machine, when an effect indicating a winning expectation to a player is executed a plurality of times during a variable effect, the pattern of the effect to be executed a plurality of times is collectively determined at the start of the variation. On the other hand, a method of determining the degree of expectation that will be a hit in each production unit can be considered.
However, when determining the degree of expectation to be hit in each effect unit during one variable effect, there may be a case where an effect showing a high degree of expectation is performed once and then an effect having a low degree of expectation is performed. As a result, the player realizes that it may be unlikely that he / she will win, even though he / she has raised the expectation that he / she will win once, and he / she is disappointed and enjoys playing the game. There is a risk that it will be distorted.
This technical idea was made to solve the above-exemplified problems, etc., and while suppressing the distraction of the game, the degree of expectation that is hit in each production unit during one variable production. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can determine.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (operation means)
110 Main control device (main control means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of sub control means)
114 Display control device (part of sub control means)
151 Comment display (third production)
152 Child character appearance (4th production)
153 Super Reach Selection 154 Character Appearance (4th Production)
155 cut-in (third production, fifth production)
222b Judgment upper limit pointer (boundary value defining means)
222c rank judgment table (memory means)
222c1 1st rank determination table (2nd storage means)
222c2-c5 2nd to 5th rank determination table (1st storage means)
223d Notice production counter (counter)
223f 2nd pointer (rank information storage means)
223h Notice effect counter maximum value memory (boundary value storage means)
223i Judgment rank memory (rank storage means)
S1207 Fluctuation start processing (selection means)
S1404 (acquisition means)
S1907 Frame button input monitoring process (operation reception means)
S1909 Notice production processing (second production execution means)
S1913 Counter update process (update means)
S1914 Fluctuation setting process (first effect execution means)
S2114 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2135 Notice production rank determination process (selection means)
S2142 (Judgment means)
S2144 (part of rank information storage control means)
S2146 (discontinuation means)
S2151 (Boundary value storage control means)
S2182 (decision means)
S2183 (Rank memory control means)

Claims (1)

It has an acquisition means for acquiring random information when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and a selection means for selecting a type of variation effect which is a dynamic display of identification information based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. A main control means and a sub-control means having a variation effect execution means for executing the variation effect based on the type of the variation effect selected by the selection means in response to an instruction from the main control means. In a game machine that gives a player a predetermined game value when a predetermined identification information appears in the variable effect executed by the variable effect executing means.
The sub-control means
A suggestion effect execution means for executing a predetermined suggestion effect for indicating the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information appears in the variation effect during the execution of one variation effect by the variation effect execution means. When,
A selection means for selecting the expectation type indicated by the predetermined suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means for each of the predetermined suggestion effects is provided.
The predetermined suggestion effect includes a plurality of types of effects having different display modes, and indicates the degree of expectation that the predetermined identification information will appear depending on the difference in the display type when the display mode is displayed.
The selection means
All types of display types can be selected for the first predetermined suggestive effect in the variable effect.
A counter that is updated within a specified range at a specified update timing,
A defining means for storing a boundary value when a predetermined range in which the counter is updated is associated with a plurality of display types that can be displayed by the predetermined suggestion effect, corresponding to each display type.
A determination means for determining whether or not to select the display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed based on the boundary value and the value of the counter in the order of the degree of expectation.
When it is determined by the determination means that a specific display type is selected as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed, the information storage means for storing the information regarding the specific display type is provided.
The game machine
In the selection of the display type in the predetermined suggestion effect to be executed, when determining whether or not to select the predetermined display type based on the boundary value and the value of the counter, the predetermined display type and When the specific display type stored in the information storage means is the same, the means for displaying the predetermined display type or the specific display type as the display type of the predetermined suggestion effect, and
Equipped with an operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the predetermined suggestion effects having a plurality of types of effects having different display modes is the suggestion effect when a predetermined time elapses from the start of execution of the variation effect in the variation effect. Executed by means of execution,
A gaming machine characterized in that after the execution of the one suggestion effect, a period during which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means is provided when the operation means is operated.

Images